Hydroxyl compounds and compositions for cholesterol management and related uses

ABSTRACT

The present invention relates to novel hydroxyl compounds, compositions comprising hydroxyl compounds, and methods useful for treating and preventing a variety of diseases and conditions such as, but not limited to aging, Alzheimer&#39;s Disease, cancer, cardiovascular disease, diabetic nephropathy, diabetic retinopathy, a disorder of glucose metabolism, dyslipidemia, dyslipoproteinemia, hypertension, impotence, inflammation, insulin resistance, lipid elimination in bile, obesity, oxysterol elimination in bile, pancreatitis, pancreatitius, Parkinson&#39;s disease, a peroxisome proliferator activated receptor-associated disorder, phospholipid elimination in bile, renal disease, septicemia, metabolic syndrome disorders (e.g., Syndrome X), thrombotic disorder. Compounds and methods of the invention can also be used to modulate C reactive protein or enhance bile production in a patient. In certain embodiments, the compounds, compositions, and methods of the invention are useful in combination therapy with other therapeutics, such as hypocholesterolemic and hypoglycemic agents.

This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No.60/441,795, filed Jan. 23, 2003, which is incorporated herein byreference in its entirety.

1. FIELD OF THE INVENTION

The invention relates to hydroxyl compounds and pharmaceuticallyacceptable salts, hydrates, solvates, and mixtures thereof; compositionscomprising a hydroxyl compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt,hydrate, solvate, or mixtures thereof; and methods for treating orpreventing a disease or disorder such as, but not limited to, aging,Alzheimer's Disease, cancer, cardiovascular disease, diabeticnephropathy, diabetic retinopathy, a disorder of glucose metabolism,dyslipidemia, dyslipoproteinemia, enhancing bile production, enhancingreverse lipid transport, hypertension, impotence, inflammation, insulinresistance, lipid elimination in bile, modulating C reactive protein,obesity, oxysterol elimination in bile, pancreatitis, Parkinson'sdisease, a peroxisome proliferator activated receptor-associateddisorder, phospholipid elimination in bile, renal disease, septicemia,metabolic syndrome disorders (e.g., Syndrome X), and a thromboticdisorder, which method comprise administering a hydroxyl compound orcomposition of the invention. The compounds of the invention can alsotreat or prevent inflammatory processes and diseases likegastrointestinal disease, irritable bowel syndrome (IBS), inflammatorybowel disease (e.g., Crohn's Disease, ulcerative colitis), arthritis(e.g., rheumatoid arthritis, osteoarthritis), autoimmune disease (e.g.,systemic lupus erythematosus), scleroderma, ankylosing spondylitis, goutand pseudogout, muscle pain: polymyositis/polymyalgiarheumatica/fibrositis; infection and arthritis, juvenile rheumatoidarthritis, tendonitis, bursitis and other soft tissue rheumatism.

2. BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

Obesity, hyperlipidemia, and diabetes have been shown to play a causalrole in atherosclerotic cardiovascular diseases, which currently accountfor a considerable proportion of morbidity in Western society. Further,one human disease, termed “Syndrome X” or “Metabolic Syndrome”, ismanifested by defective glucose metabolism (insulin resistance),elevated blood pressure (hypertension), and a blood lipid imbalance(dyslipidemia). See e.g. Reaven, 1993, Annu. Rev. Med. 44:121-131.

The evidence linking elevated serum cholesterol to coronary heartdisease is overwhelming. Circulating cholesterol is carried by plasmalipoproteins, which are particles of complex lipid and proteincomposition that transport lipids in the blood. Low density lipoprotein(LDL) and high density lipoprotein (HDL) are the majorcholesterol-carrier proteins. LDL is believed to be responsible for thedelivery of cholesterol from the liver, where it is synthesized orobtained from dietary sources, to extrahepatic tissues in the body. Theterm “reverse cholesterol transport” describes the transport ofcholesterol from extrahepatic tissues to the liver, where it iscatabolized and eliminated. It is believed that plasma HDL particlesplay a major role in the reverse transport process, acting as scavengersof tissue cholesterol. HDL is also responsible for the removal ofnon-cholesterol lipid, oxidized cholesterol and other oxidized productsfrom the bloodstream.

Atherosclerosis, for example, is a slowly progressive diseasecharacterized by the accumulation of cholesterol within the arterialwall. Compelling evidence supports the belief that lipids deposited inatherosclerotic lesions are derived primarily from plasma apolipoproteinB (apo B)-containing lipoproteins, which include chylomicrons, CLDL,intermediate-density lipoproteins (IDL), and LDL. The apo B-containinglipoprotein, and in particular LDL, has popularly become known as the“bad” cholesterol. In contrast, HDL serum levels correlate inverselywith coronary heart disease. Indeed, high serum levels of HDL areregarded as a negative risk factor. It is hypothesized that high levelsof plasma HDL are not only protective against coronary artery disease,but may actually induce regression of atherosclerotic plaque (e.g., seeBadimon et al., 1992, Circulation 86:(Suppl. III)86-94; Dansky andFisher, 1999, Circulation 100:1762 3.). Thus, HDL has popularly becomeknown as the “good” cholesterol.

2.1 Cholesterol Transport

The fat-transport system can be divided into two pathways: an exogenousone for cholesterol and triglycerides absorbed from the intestine and anendogenous one for cholesterol and triglycerides entering thebloodstream from the liver and other non-hepatic tissue.

In the exogenous pathway, dietary fats are packaged into lipoproteinparticles called chylomicrons, which enter the bloodstream and delivertheir triglycerides to adipose tissue for storage and to muscle foroxidation to supply energy. The remnant of the chylomicron, whichcontains cholesteryl esters, is removed from the circulation by aspecific receptor found only on liver cells. This cholesterol thenbecomes available again for cellular metabolism or for recycling toextrahepatic tissues as plasma lipoproteins.

In the endogenous pathway, the liver secretes a large, very-low-densitylipoprotein particle (VLDL) into the bloodstream. The core of VLDLconsists mostly of triglycerides synthesized in the liver, with asmaller amount of cholesteryl esters either synthesized in the liver orrecycled from chylomicrons. Two predominant proteins are displayed onthe surface of VLDL, apolipoprotein B-100 (apo B-100) and apolipoproteinE (apo E), although other apolipoproteins are present, such asapolipoprotein CIII (apo CIII) and apolipoprotein CII (apo CII). WhenVLDL reaches the capillaries of adipose tissue or of muscle, itstriglyceride is extracted. This results in the formation of a new kindof particle called intermediate-density lipoprotein (IDL) or VLDLremnant, decreased in size and enriched in cholesteryl esters relativeto a VLDL, but retaining its two apoproteins.

In human beings, about half of the IDL particles are removed from thecirculation quickly, generally within two to six hours of theirformation. This is because IDL particles bind tightly to liver cells,which extract IDL cholesterol to make new VLDL and bile acids. The IDLnot taken up by the liver is catabolized by the hepatic lipase, anenzyme bound to the proteoglycan on liver cells. Apo E dissociates fromIDL as it is transformed to LDL. Apo B-100 is the sole protein of LDL.

Primarily, the liver takes up and degrades circulating cholesterol tobile acids, which are the end products of cholesterol metabolism. Theuptake of cholesterol-containing particles is mediated by LDL receptors,which are present in high concentrations on hepatocytes. The LDLreceptor binds both apo E and apo B-100 and is responsible for bindingand removing both IDL and LDL from the circulation. In addition, remnantreceptors are responsible for clearing chylomicrons and VLDL remnants(i.e., IDL). However, the affinity of apo E for the LDL receptor isgreater than that of apo B-100. As a result, the LDL particles have amuch longer circulating life span than IDL particles; LDL circulates foran average of two and a half days before binding to the LDL receptors inthe liver and other tissues. High serum levels of LDL, the “bad”cholesterol, are positively associated with coronary heart disease. Forexample, in atherosclerosis, cholesterol derived from circulating LDLaccumulates in the walls of arteries. This accumulation forms bulkyplaques that inhibit the flow of blood until a clot eventually forms,obstructing an artery and causing a heart attack or stroke.

Ultimately, the amount of intracellular cholesterol liberated from theLDL controls cellular cholesterol metabolism. The accumulation ofcellular cholesterol derived from VLDL and LDL controls three processes.First, it reduces the ability of the cell to make its own cholesterol byturning off the synthesis of HMGCoA reductase, a key enzyme in thecholesterol biosynthetic pathway. Second, the incoming LDL-derivedcholesterol promotes storage of cholesterol by the action of cholesterolacyltransferase (“ACAT”), the cellular enzyme that converts cholesterolinto cholesteryl esters that are deposited in storage droplets. Third,the accumulation of cholesterol within the cell drives a feedbackmechanism that inhibits cellular synthesis of new LDL receptors. Cells,therefore, adjust their complement of LDL receptors so that enoughcholesterol is brought in to meet their metabolic needs, withoutoverloading (for a review, see Brown & Goldstein, in The PharmacologicalBasis Of Therapeutics, 8th Ed., Goodman & Gilman, Pergamon Press, NewYork, 1990, Ch. 36, pp. 874-896).

High levels of apo B-containing lipoproteins can be trapped in thesubendothelial space of an artery and undergo oxidation. The oxidizedlipoprotein is recognized by scavenger receptors on macrophages. Bindingof oxidized lipoprotein to the scavenger receptors can enrich themacrophages with cholesterol and cholesteryl esters independently of theLDL receptor. Macrophages can also produce cholesteryl esters by theaction of ACAT. LDL can also be complexed to a high molecular weightglycoprotein called apolipoprotein(a), also known as apo(a), through adisulfide bridge. The LDL-apo(a) complex is known as Lipoprotein(a) orLp(a). Elevated levels of Lp(a) are detrimental, having been associatedwith atherosclerosis, coronary heart disease, myocardial infarction,stroke, cerebral infarction, and restenosis following angioplasty.

2.2 Reverse Cholesterol Transport

Peripheral (non-hepatic) cells predominantly obtain their cholesterolfrom a combination of local synthesis and uptake of preformed sterolfrom VLDL and LDL. Cells expressing scavenger receptors, such asmacrophages and smooth muscle cells, can also obtain cholesterol fromoxidized apo B-containing lipoproteins. In contrast, reverse cholesteroltransport (RCT) is the pathway by which peripheral cell cholesterol canbe returned to the liver for recycling to extrahepatic tissues, hepaticstorage, or excretion into the intestine in bile. The RCT pathwayrepresents the only means of eliminating cholesterol from mostextrahepatic tissues and is crucial to the maintenance of the structureand function of most cells in the body.

The enzyme in blood involved in the RCT pathway, lecithin:cholesterolacyltransferase (LCAT), converts cell-derived cholesterol to cholesterylesters, which are sequestered in HDL destined for removal. LCAT isproduced mainly in the liver and circulates in plasma associated withthe HDL fraction. Cholesterol ester transfer protein (CETP) and anotherlipid transfer protein, phospholipid transfer protein (PLTP), contributeto further remodeling the circulating HDL population (see for exampleBruce et al., 1998, Annu. Rev. Nutr. 18:297 330). PLTP supplies lecithinto HDL, and CETP can move cholesteryl esters made by LCAT to otherlipoproteins, particularly apoB-containing lipoproteins, such as VLDL.HDL triglycerides can be catabolized by the extracellular hepatictriglyceride lipase, and lipoprotein cholesterol is removed by the livervia several mechanisms.

Each HDL particle contains at least one molecule, and usually two tofour molecules, of apolipoprotein A I (apo A I). Apo A I is synthesizedby the liver and small intestine as preproapolipoprotein, which issecreted as a proprotein that is rapidly cleaved to generate a maturepolypeptide having 243 amino acid residues. Apo A I consists mainly of a22 amino acid repeating segment, spaced with helix-breaking prolineresidues. Apo A I forms three types of stable structures with lipids:small, lipid-poor complexes referred to as pre-beta-1 HDL; flatteneddiscoidal particles, referred to as pre-beta-2 HDL, which contain onlypolar lipids (e.g., phospholipid and cholesterol); and sphericalparticles containing both polar and nonpolar lipids, referred to asspherical or mature HDL (HDL3 and HDL2). Most HDL in the circulatingpopulation contains both apo A I and apo A II, a second major HDLprotein. This apo A I- and apo A II-containing fraction is referred toherein as the AI/AII-HDL fraction of HDL. But the fraction of HDLcontaining only apo A I, referred to herein as the AI HDL fraction,appears to be more effective in RCT. Certain epidemiologic studiessupport the hypothesis that the AI-HDL fraction is antiartherogenic(Parra et al., 1992, Arterioscler. Thromb. 12:701-707; Decossin et al.,1997, Eur. J. Clin. Invest. 22:299-307).

Although the mechanism for cholesterol transfer from the cell surface isunknown, it is believed that the lipid-poor complex, pre-beta-1 HDL, isthe preferred acceptor for cholesterol transferred from peripheraltissue involved in RCT. Cholesterol newly transferred to pre-beta-1 HDLfrom the cell surface rapidly appears in the discoidal pre-beta-2 HDL.PLTP may increase the rate of disc formation (Lagrost et al., 1996, J.Biol. Chem. 271:19058-19065), but data indicating a role for PLTP in RCTis lacking. LCAT reacts preferentially with discoidal and spherical HDL,transferring the 2-acyl group of lecithin or phosphatidylethanolamine tothe free hydroxyl residue of fatty alcohols, particularly cholesterol,to generate cholesteryl esters (retained in the HDL) and lysolecithin.The LCAT reaction requires an apolipoprotein such as apo A I or apo A-IVas an activator. ApoA-I is one of the natural cofactors for LCAT. Theconversion of cholesterol to its HDL-sequestered ester prevents re-entryof cholesterol into the cell, resulting in the ultimate removal ofcellular cholesterol. Cholesteryl esters in the mature HDL particles ofthe AI-HDL fraction are removed by the liver and processed into bilemore effectively than those derived from the AI/AII-HDL fraction. Thismay be due, in part, to the more effective binding of AI-HDL to thehepatocyte membrane. Several HDL receptors have been identified, themost well characterized of which is the scavenger receptor class B, typeI (SR BI) (Acton et al., 1996, Science 271:518-520). The SR-BI isexpressed most abundantly in steroidogenic tissues (e.g., the adrenals),and in the liver (Landshulz et al., 1996, J. Clin. Invest. 98:984-995;Rigotti et al., 1996, J. Biol. Chem. 271:33545-33549). Other proposedHDL receptors include HB1 and HB2 (Hidaka and Fidge, 1992, Biochem J. 1:161 7; Kurata et al., 1998, J. Atherosclerosis and Thrombosis 4:112 7).

While there is a consensus that CETP is involved in the metabolism ofVLDL- and LDL-derived lipids, its role in RCT remains controversial.However, changes in CETP activity or its acceptors, VLDL and LDL, play arole in “remodeling” the HDL population. For example, in the absence ofCETP, the HDL becomes enlarged particles that are poorly removed fromthe circulation (for reviews on RCT and HDL, See Fielding & Fielding,1995, J. Lipid Res. 36:211-228; Barrans et al., 1996, Biochem. Biophys.Acta. 1300:73-85; Hirano et al., 1997, Arterioscler. Thromb. Vasc. Biol.17:1053-1059).

2.3 Reverse Transport of Other Lipids

HDL is not only involved in the reverse transport of cholesterol, butalso plays a role in the reverse transport of other lipids, i.e., thetransport of lipids from cells, organs, and tissues to the liver forcatabolism and excretion. Such lipids include sphingomyelin, oxidizedlipids, and lysophophatidylcholine. For example, Robins and Fasulo(1997, J. Clin. Invest. 99:380 384) have shown that HDL stimulates thetransport of plant sterol by the liver into bile secretions.

2.4 Peroxisome Proliferator Activated Receptor Pathway

Peroxisome proliferators are a structurally diverse group of compoundsthat, when administered to rodents, elicit dramatic increases in thesize and number of hepatic and renal peroxisomes, as well as concomitantincreases in the capacity of peroxisomes to metabolize fatty acids viaincreased expression of the enzymes required for the β-oxidation cycle(Lazarow and Fujiki, 1985, Ann. Rev. Cell Biol. 1:489 530; Vamecq andDraye, 1989, Essays Biochem. 24:1115 225; and Nelali et al., 1988,Cancer Res. 48:5316 5324). Chemicals included in this group are thefibrate class of hypolipidemic drugs, herbicides, and phthalateplasticizers (Reddy and Lalwani, 1983, Crit. Rev. Toxicol. 12:1 58).Peroxisome proliferation can also be elicited by dietary orphysiological factors, such as a high fat diet and cold acclimatization.

Insight into the mechanism whereby peroxisome proliferators exert theirpleiotropic effects was provided by the identification of a member ofthe nuclear hormone receptor superfamily activated by these chemicals(Isseman and Green, 1990, Nature 347:645 650). This receptor, termedperoxisome proliferator activated receptor α (PPARα), was subsequentlyshown to be activated by a variety of medium and long chain fatty acids.PPARα activates transcription by binding to DNA sequence elements,termed peroxisome proliferator response elements (PPRE), in the form ofa heterodimer with the retinoid X receptor (RXR). RXR is activated by9-cis retinoic acid (see Kliewer et al., 1992, Nature 358:771 774;Gearing et al., 1993, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:1440 1444, Keller etal., 1993, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:2160 2164; Heyman et al., 1992,Cell 68:397 406, and Levin et al., 1992, Nature 355:359 361). Since thediscovery of PPARα, additional isoforms of PPAR have been identified,e.g., PPARβ, PPARγ and PPARδ, which have similar functions and aresimilarly regulated.

PPARs have been identified in the enhancers of a number of gene-encodingproteins that regulate lipid metabolism. These proteins include thethree enzymes required for peroxisomal β-oxidation of fatty acids;apolipoprotein A-I; medium chain acyl-CoA dehydrogenase, a key enzyme inmitochondrial β-oxidation; and aP2, a lipid binding protein expressedexclusively in adipocytes (reviewed in Keller and Whali, 1993, TEM,4:291 296; see also Staels and Auwerx, 1998, Atherosclerosis 137Suppl:S19 23). The nature of the PPAR target genes coupled with theactivation of PPARs by fatty acids and hypolipidemic drugs suggests aphysiological role for the PPARs in lipid homeostasis.

Pioglitazone, an antidiabetic compound of the thiazolidinedione class,was reported to stimulate expression of a chimeric gene containing theenhancer/promoter of the lipid binding protein aP2 upstream of thechloroamphenicol acetyl transferase reporter gene (Harris and Kletzien,1994, Mol. Pharmacol. 4:439 445). Deletion analysis led to theidentification of an approximately 30 bp region accounting forpioglitazone responsiveness. In an independent study, this 30 bpfragment was shown to contain a PPRE (Tontonoz et al., 1994, NucleicAcids Res. 22:5628 5634). Taken together, these studies suggested thepossibility that the thiazolidinediones modulate gene expression at thetranscriptional level through interactions with a PPAR and reinforce theconcept of the interrelatedness of glucose and lipid metabolism.

2.5 Current Cholesterol Management Therapies

In the past two decades or so, the segregation of cholesterolemiccompounds into HDL and LDL regulators and recognition of thedesirability of decreasing blood levels of the latter has led to thedevelopment of a number of drugs. However, many of these drugs haveundesirable side effects and/or are contraindicated in certain patients,particularly when administered in combination with other drugs.

Bile-acid-binding resins are a class of drugs that interrupt therecycling of bile acids from the intestine to the liver. Examples ofbile-acid-binding resins are cholestyramine (QUESTRAN LIGHT,Bristol-Myers Squibb), and colestipol hydrochloride (COLESTID, Pharmacia& Upjohn Company). When taken orally, these positively charged resinsbind to negatively charged bile acids in the intestine. Because theresins cannot be absorbed from the intestine, they are excreted,carrying the bile acids with them. The use of such resins, however, atbest only lowers serum cholesterol levels by about 20%. Moreover, theiruse is associated with gastrointestinal side-effects, includingconstipation and certain vitamin deficiencies. Moreover, since theresins bind to drugs, other oral medications must be taken at least onehour before or four to six hours subsequent to ingestion of the resin,complicating heart patients' drug regimens.

The statins are inhibitors of cholesterol synthesis. Sometimes, thestatins are used in combination therapy with bile-acid-binding resins.Lovastatin (MEVACOR, Merck & Co., Inc.), a natural product derived froma strain of Aspergillus; pravastatin (PRAVACHOL, Bristol-Myers SquibbCo.); and atorvastatin (LIPITOR, Warner Lambert) block cholesterolsynthesis by inhibiting HMGCoA reductase, the key enzyme involved in thecholesterol biosynthetic pathway. Lovastatin significantly reduces serumcholesterol and LDL-serum levels. However, serum HDL levels are onlyslightly increased following lovastatin administration. The mechanism ofthe LDL-lowering effect may involve both reduction of VLDL concentrationand induction of cellular expression of LDL-receptor, leading to reducedproduction and/or increased catabolism of LDL. Side effects, includingliver and kidney dysfunction are associated with the use of these drugs.

Nicotinic acid, also known as niacin, is a water-soluble vitaminB-complex used as a dietary supplement and antihyperlipidemic agent.Niacin diminishes the production of VLDL and is effective at loweringLDL. It is used in combination with bile-acid-binding resins. Niacin canincrease HDL when administered at therapeutically effective doses;however, its usefulness is limited by serious side effects.

Fibrates are a class of lipid-lowering drugs used to treat various formsof hyperlipidemia, elevated serum triglycerides, which may also beassociated with hypercholesterolemia. Fibrates appear to reduce the VLDLfraction and modestly increase HDL; however, the effects of these drugson serum cholesterol is variable. In the United States, fibrates havebeen approved for use as antilipidemic drugs, but have not receivedapproval as hypercholesterolemia agents. For example, clofibrate(ATROMID-S, Wyeth-Ayerst Laboratories) is an antilipidemic agent thatacts to lower serum triglycerides by reducing the VLDL fraction.Although ATROMID-S may reduce serum cholesterol levels in certainpatient subpopulations, the biochemical response to the drug isvariable, and is not always possible to predict which patients willobtain favorable results. ATROMID-S has not been shown to be effectivefor prevention of coronary heart disease. The chemically andpharmacologically related drug, gemfibrozil (LOPID, Parke-Davis), is alipid regulating agent which moderately decreases serum triglyceridesand VLDL cholesterol. LOPID also increases HDL cholesterol, particularlythe HDL2 and HDL3 subfractions, as well as both the AI/AII-HDLfractions. However, the lipid response to LOPID is heterogeneous,especially among different patient populations. Moreover, whileprevention of coronary heart disease was observed in male patientsbetween the ages of 40 and 55 without history or symptoms of existingcoronary heart disease, it is not clear to what extent these findingscan be extrapolated to other patient populations (e.g., women, older andyounger males). Indeed, no efficacy was observed in patients withestablished coronary heart disease. Serious side-effects are associatedwith the use of fibrates, including toxicity; malignancy, particularlymalignancy of gastrointestinal cancer; gallbladder disease; and anincreased incidence in non-coronary mortality. These drugs are notindicated for the treatment of patients with high LDL or low HDL astheir only lipid abnormality.

Oral estrogen replacement therapy may be considered for moderatehypercholesterolemia in post-menopausal women. However, increases in HDLmay be accompanied with an increase in triglycerides. Estrogen treatmentis, of course, limited to a specific patient population, postmenopausalwomen, and is associated with serious side effects, including inductionof malignant neoplasms; gall bladder disease; thromboembolic disease;hepatic adenoma; elevated blood pressure; glucose intolerance; andhypercalcemia. Long chain carboxylic acids, particularly long chainα,ω-dicarboxylic acids with distinctive substitution patterns, and theirsimple derivatives and salts, have been disclosed for treatingatherosclerosis, obesity, and diabetes (See, e.g., Bisgaier et al.,1998, J. Lipid Res. 39:17-30, and references cited therein;International Patent Publication WO 98/30530; U.S. Pat. No. 4,689,344;International Patent Publication WO 99/00116; and U.S. Pat. No.5,756,344). However, some of these compounds, for example theα,ω-dicarboxylic acids substituted at their α,α′-carbons (U.S. Pat. No.3,773,946), while having serum triglyceride and serumcholesterol-lowering activities, have no value for treatment of obesityand hypercholesterolemia (U.S. Pat. No. 4,689,344).

U.S. Pat. No. 4,689,344 disclosesβ,β,β′,β′-tetrasubstituted-α,ω-alkanedioic acids that are optionallysubstituted at their α,α,α′,α′-positions, and alleges that they areuseful for treating obesity, hyperlipidemia, and diabetes. According tothis reference, both triglycerides and cholesterol are loweredsignificantly by compounds such as3,3,14,14-tetramethylhexadecane-1,16-dioic acid. U.S. Pat. No. 4,689,344further discloses that the β,β,β′,β′-tetramethyl-alkanediols of U.S.Pat. No. 3,930,024 also are not useful for treating hypercholesterolemiaor obesity.

Other compounds are disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,711,896. In U.S. Pat.No. 5,756,544, α,β-dicarboxylic acid-terminated dialkane ethers aredisclosed to have activity in lowering certain plasma lipids, includingLp(a), triglycerides, VLDL-cholesterol, and LDL-cholesterol, in animals,and elevating others, such as HDL-cholesterol. The compounds are alsostated to increase insulin sensitivity. In U.S. Pat. No. 4,613,593,phosphates of dolichol, a polyprenol isolated from swine liver, arestated to be useful in regenerating liver tissue, and in treatinghyperuricuria, hyperlipemia, diabetes, and hepatic diseases in general.

U.S. Pat. No. 4,287,200 discloses azolidinedione derivatives withantidiabetic, hypolipidemic, and anti-hypertensive properties. However,the administration of these compounds to patients can produce sideeffects such as bone marrow depression, and both liver and cardiaccytotoxicity. Further, the compounds disclosed by U.S. Pat. No.4,287,200 stimulate weight gain in obese patients.

It is clear that none of the commercially available cholesterolmanagement drugs has a general utility in regulating lipid, lipoprotein,insulin and glucose levels in the blood. Thus, compounds that have oneor more of these utilities are clearly needed. Further, there is a clearneed to develop safer drugs that are efficacious at lowering serumcholesterol, increasing HDL serum levels, preventing coronary heartdisease, and/or treating existing disease such as atherosclerosis,obesity, diabetes, and other diseases that are affected by lipidmetabolism and/or lipid levels. There is also a clear need to developdrugs that may be used with other lipid-altering treatment regimens in asynergistic manner. There is still a further need to provide usefultherapeutic agents whose solubility and Hydrophile/Lipophile Balance(HLB) can be readily varied.

Citation or identification of any reference in Section 2 of thisapplication is not an admission that such reference is available asprior art to the present invention.

3. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

The invention encompasses hydroxyl compounds useful in treating variousdisorders.

The invention further encompasses pharmaceutical compositions comprisingone or more compounds of the invention and a pharmaceutically acceptablevehicle, excipient, or diluent. A pharmaceutically acceptable vehiclecan comprise a carrier, excipient, diluent, or a mixture thereof.

The invention encompasses a method for treating or preventing aging,Alzheimer's Disease, cancer, cardiovascular disease, diabeticnephropathy, diabetic retinopathy, a disorder of glucose metabolism,dyslipidemia, dyslipoproteinemia, enhancing bile production, enhancingreverse lipid transport, hypertension, impotence, inflammation, insulinresistance, lipid elimination in bile, modulating C reactive protein,obesity, oxysterol elimination in bile, pancreatitis, Parkinson'sdisease, a peroxisome proliferator activated receptor-associateddisorder, phospholipid elimination in bile, renal disease, septicemia,metabolic syndrome disorders (e.g., Syndrome X), and a thromboticdisorder, comprising administering to a patient in need of suchtreatment or prevention a therapeutically effective amount of a compoundof the invention or a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compoundof the invention and a pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle, excipient,or diluent. The invention also encompasses a method for inhibitinghepatic fatty acid and sterol synthesis comprising administering to apatient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a compoundof the invention or a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compoundof the invention and a pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle, excipient,or diluent.

The invention also encompasses a method of treating or preventing adisease or disorder that is capable of being treated or prevented byincreasing HDL levels, which comprises administering to a patient inneed of such treatment or prevention a therapeutically effective amountof a compound of the invention and a pharmaceutically acceptablevehicle, excipient, or diluent.

The invention also encompasses a method of treating or preventing adisease or disorder that is capable of being treated or prevented bylowering LDL levels, which comprises administering to such patient inneed of such treatment or prevention a therapeutically effective amountof a compound of the invention and a pharmaceutically acceptablevehicle, excipient, or diluent.

The compounds of the invention favorably alter lipid metabolism inanimal models of dyslipidemia at least in part by enhancing oxidation offatty acids through the ACC/malonyl-CoA/CPT-I regulatory axis andtherefore the invention also encompasses methods of treatment orprevention of metabolic syndrome disorders.

The invention further encompasses a method for reducing the fat contentof meat in livestock comprising administering to livestock in need ofsuch fat-content reduction a therapeutically effective amount of acompound of the invention or a pharmaceutical composition comprising acompound of the invention and a pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle,excipient, or diluent.

The invention encompasses a method for reducing the cholesterol contentof a fowl egg comprising administering to a fowl species atherapeutically effective amount of a compound of the invention or apharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of the invention and apharmaceutically acceptable vehicle, excipient, or diluent.

The present invention may be understood more fully by reference to thedetailed description and examples, which are intended to exemplifynon-limiting embodiments of the invention.

4. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

-   -   Apo(a): apolipoprotein(a)    -   Apo A-I: apolipoprotein A-I    -   Apo B: apolipoprotein B    -   Apo E: apolipoprotein E    -   FH: Familial hypercholesterolemia    -   FCH: Familial combined hyperlipidemia    -   GDM: Gestational diabetes mellitus    -   HDL: High density lipoprotein    -   IDL: Intermediate density lipoprotein    -   IDDM: Insulin dependent diabetes mellitus    -   LDH: Lactate dehdyrogenase    -   LDL: Low density lipoprotein    -   Lp(a): Lipoprotein (a)    -   MODY: Maturity onset diabetes of the young    -   NIDDM: Non-insulin dependent diabetes mellitus    -   PPAR: Peroxisome proliferator activated receptor    -   RXR: Retinoid X receptor    -   VLDL: Very low density lipoprotein

As used herein, the phrase “compounds of the invention” means compoundsdisclosed herein. Particular compounds of the invention are compounds offormulas I, II, III, IV, V, VI, VII, VIII, IX and pharmaceuticallyacceptable salts, hydrates, enantiomers, diastereomer, racemates ormixtures of stereoisomers thereof. Thus, “compound of the invention”collectively means compound of formulas I, II, III, IV, V, VI, VII,VIII, and IX and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates,enantiomers, diastereomer, racemates or mixtures of stereoisomersthereof. The compounds of the invention are identified herein by theirchemical structure and/or chemical name. Where a compound is referred toby both a chemical structure and a chemical name, and the chemicalstructure and chemical name conflict, the chemical structure is to beaccorded more weight.

The compounds of the invention can contain one or more chiral centersand/or double bonds and, therefore, exist as stereoisomers, such asdouble-bond isomers (i.e., geometric isomers), enantiomers, ordiastereomers. According to the invention, the chemical structuresdepicted herein, and therefore the compounds of the invention, encompassall of the corresponding compounds' enantiomers and stereoisomers, thatis, both the stereomerically pure form (e.g., geometrically pure,enantiomerically pure, or diastereomerically pure) and enantiomeric andstereoisomeric mixtures.

As used herein, a composition that “substantially” comprises a compoundmeans that the composition contains more than about 80% by weight, morepreferably more than about 90% by weight, even more preferably more thanabout 95% by weight, and most preferably more than about 97% by weightof the compound.

As used herein, a reaction that is “substantially complete” means thatthe reaction contains more than about 80% by weight of the desiredproduct, more preferably more than about 90% by weight of the desiredproduct, even more preferably more than about 95% by weight of thedesired product, and most preferably more than about 97% by weight ofthe desired product.

A compound of the invention is considered optically active orenantiomerically pure (i.e., substantially the R-form or substantiallythe S-form) with respect to a chiral center when the compound is about90% ee (enantiomeric excess) or greater, preferably, equal to or greaterthan 95% ee with respect to a particular chiral center. A compound ofthe invention is considered to be in enantiomerically-enriched form whenthe compound has an enantiomeric excess of greater than about 1% ee,preferably greater than about 5% ee, more preferably, greater than about10% ee with respect to a particular chiral center. A compound of theinvention is considered diastereomerically pure with respect to multiplechiral centers when the compound is about 90% de (diastereomeric excess)or greater, preferably, equal to or greater than 95% de with respect toa particular chiral center. A compound of the invention is considered tobe in diastereomerically-enriched form when the compound has andiastereomeric excess of greater than about 1% de, preferably greaterthan about 5% de, more preferably, greater than about 10% de withrespect to a particular chiral center. As used herein, a racemic mixturemeans about 50% of one enantiomer and about 50% of is correspondingenantiomer relative to all chiral centers in the molecule. Thus, theinvention encompasses all enantiomerically-pure,enantiomerically-enriched, diastereomerically pure, diastereomericallyenriched, and racemic mixtures of compounds of Formulas I through IX.

Enantiomeric and diastereomeric mixtures can be resolved into theircomponent enantiomers or stereoisomers by well known methods, such aschiral-phase gas chromatography, chiral-phase high performance liquidchromatography, crystallizing the compound as a chiral salt complex, orcrystallizing the compound in a chiral solvent. Enantiomers anddiastereomers can also be obtained from diastereomerically- orenantiomerically-pure intermediates, reagents, and catalysts by wellknown asymmetric synthetic methods.

The compounds of the invention are defined herein by their chemicalstructures and/or chemical names. Where a compound is referred to byboth a chemical structure and a chemical name, and the chemicalstructure and chemical name conflict, the chemical structure isdeterminative of the compound's identity.

When administered to a patient, e.g., to an animal for veterinary use orfor improvement of livestock, or to a human for clinical use, thecompounds of the invention are administered in isolated form or as theisolated form in a pharmaceutical composition. As used herein,“isolated” means that the compounds of the invention are separated fromother components of either (a) a natural source, such as a plant orcell, preferably bacterial culture, or (b) a synthetic organic chemicalreaction mixture. Preferably, via conventional techniques, the compoundsof the invention are purified. As used herein, “purified” means thatwhen isolated, the isolate contains at least 95%, preferably at least98%, of a single hydroxy compound of the invention by weight of theisolate.

The phrase “pharmaceutically acceptable salt(s),” as used hereinincludes, but is not limited to, salts of acidic or basic groups thatmay be present in the compounds of the invention. Compounds that arebasic in nature are capable of forming a wide variety of salts withvarious inorganic and organic acids. The acids that may be used toprepare pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts of such basiccompounds are those that form non-toxic acid addition salts, i.e., saltscontaining pharmacologically acceptable anions, including but notlimited to sulfuric, citric, maleic, acetic, oxalic, hydrochloride,hydrobromide, hydroiodide, nitrate, sulfate, bisulfate, phosphate, acidphosphate, isonicotinate, acetate, lactate, salicylate, citrate, acidcitrate, tartrate, oleate, tannate, pantothenate, bitartrate, ascorbate,succinate, maleate, gentisinate, fumarate, gluconate, glucaronate,saccharate, formate, benzoate, glutamate, methanesulfonate,ethanesulfonate, benzenesulfonate, p-toluenesulfonate and pamoate (i.e.,1,1′-methylene-bis-(2-hydroxy-3-naphthoate)) salts. Compounds of theinvention that include an amino moiety also can form pharmaceuticallyacceptable salts with various amino acids, in addition to the acidsmentioned above. Compounds of the invention that are acidic in natureare capable of forming base salts with various pharmacologicallyacceptable cations. Examples of such salts include alkali metal oralkaline earth metal salts and, particularly, calcium, magnesium, sodiumlithium, zinc, potassium, and iron salts.

As used herein, the term “hydrate” means a compound of the invention ora salt thereof, that further includes a stoichiometric ornon-stoichiometric amount of water bound by non-covalent intermolecularforces. The term hydrate includes solvates, which are stoichiometric ornon-stoichiometric amounts of a solvent bound by non-covalentintermolecular forces. Preferred solvents are volatile, non-toxic,and/or acceptable for administration to humans in trace amounts.

As used herein, the term “altering lipid metabolism” indicates anobservable (measurable) change in at least one aspect of lipidmetabolism, including but not limited to total blood lipid content,blood HDL cholesterol, blood LDL cholesterol, blood VLDL cholesterol,blood triglyceride, blood Lp(a), blood apo A-I, blood apo E and bloodnon-esterified fatty acids.

As used herein, the term “altering glucose metabolism” indicates anobservable (measurable) change in at least one aspect of glucosemetabolism, including but not limited to total blood glucose content,blood insulin, the blood insulin to blood glucose ratio, insulinsensitivity, and oxygen consumption.

As used herein, the term “alkyl group” means a saturated, monovalentunbranched or branched hydrocarbon chain. Examples of alkyl groupsinclude, but are not limited to, (C₁-C₆)alkyl groups, such as methyl,ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, 2-methyl-1-propyl, 2 methyl 2-propyl,2-methyl-1-butyl, 3-methyl-1-butyl, 2 methyl-3-butyl, 2,2 dimethyl1-propyl, 2-methyl-1-pentyl, 3 methyl-1-pentyl, 4 methyl-1-pentyl,2-methyl-2-pentyl, 3-methyl-2-pentyl, 4 methyl 2 pentyl, 2,2 dimethyl 1butyl, 3,3-dimethyl-1-butyl, 2-ethyl-1-butyl, butyl, isobutyl, t-butyl,pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, and hexyl, and longer alkyl groups, suchas heptyl, and octyl. An alkyl group can be unsubstituted or substitutedwith one or two suitable substituents.

As used herein, the term an “alkenyl group” means a monovalentunbranched or branched hydrocarbon chain having one or more double bondstherein. The double bond of an alkenyl group can be unconjugated orconjugated to another unsaturated group. Suitable alkenyl groupsinclude, but are not limited to (C₂-C₆)alkenyl groups, such as vinyl,allyl, butenyl, pentenyl, hexenyl, butadienyl, pentadienyl, hexadienyl,2-ethylhexenyl, 2-propyl-2-butenyl, 4-(2-methyl-3-butene)-pentenyl. Analkenyl group can be unsubstituted or substituted with one or twosuitable substituents.

As used herein, the term an “alkynyl group” means monovalent unbranchedor branched hydrocarbon chain having one or more triple bonds therein.The triple bond of an alkynyl group can be unconjugated or conjugated toanother unsaturated group. Suitable alkynyl groups include, but are notlimited to, (C₂-C₆)alkynyl groups, such as ethynyl, propynyl, butynyl,pentynyl, hexynyl, methylpropynyl, 4-methyl-1-butynyl,4-propyl-2-pentynyl, and 4-butyl-2-hexynyl. An alkynyl group can beunsubstituted or substituted with one or two suitable substituents.

As used herein, the term an “aryl group” means a monocyclic orpolycyclic-aromatic radical comprising carbon and hydrogen atoms.Examples of suitable aryl groups include, but are not limited to,phenyl, tolyl, anthacenyl, fluorenyl, indenyl, azulenyl, and naphthyl,as well as benzo-fused carbocyclic moieties such as5,6,7,8-tetrahydronaphthyl. An aryl group can be unsubstituted orsubstituted with one or two suitable substituents. Preferably, the arylgroup is a monocyclic ring, wherein the ring comprises 6 carbon atoms,referred to herein as “(C₆)aryl”.

As used herein, the term an “heteroaryl group” means a monocyclic- orpolycyclic aromatic ring comprising carbon atoms, hydrogen atoms, andone or more heteroatoms, preferably 1 to 3 heteroatoms, independentlyselected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. Illustrative examples ofheteroaryl groups include, but are not limited to, pyridinyl,pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazyl, triazinyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl,imidazolyl, (1,2,3)- and (1,2,4)-triazolyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl,tetrazolyl, furyl, thiophenyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, furyl, phenyl,isoxazolyl, and oxazolyl. A heteroaryl group can be unsubstituted orsubstituted with one or two suitable substituents. Preferably, aheteroaryl group is a monocyclic ring, wherein the ring comprises 2 to 5carbon atoms and 1 to 3 heteroatoms, referred to herein as“(C₂-C₅)heteroaryl”.

As used herein, the term “cycloalkyl group” means a monocyclic orpolycyclic saturated ring comprising carbon and hydrogen atoms andhaving no carbon-carbon multiple bonds. Examples of cycloalkyl groupsinclude, but are not limited to, (C₃-C₇)cycloalkyl groups, such ascyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, and cycloheptyl, andsaturated cyclic and bicyclic terpenes. A cycloalkyl group can beunsubstituted or substituted by one or two suitable substituents.Preferably, the cycloalkyl group is a monocyclic ring or bicyclic ring.

As used herein, the term “heterocycloalkyl group” means a monocyclic orpolycyclic ring comprising carbon and hydrogen atoms and at least oneheteroatom, preferably, 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from nitrogen,oxygen, and sulfur, and having no unsaturation. Examples ofheterocycloalkyl groups include pyrrolidinyl, pyrrolidino, piperidinyl,piperidino, piperazinyl, piperazino, morpholinyl, morpholino,thiomorpholinyl, thiomorpholino, and pyranyl. A heterocycloalkyl groupcan be unsubstituted or substituted with one or two suitablesubstituents. Preferably, the heterocycloalkyl group is a monocyclic orbicyclic ring, more preferably, a monocyclic ring, wherein the ringcomprises from 3 to 6 carbon atoms and form 1 to 3 heteroatoms, referredto herein as (C₁-C₆)heterocycloalkyl.

As used herein, the terms “heterocyclic radical” or “heterocyclic ring”mean a heterocycloalkyl group or a heteroaryl group.

As used herein, the term “alkoxy group” means an —O-alkyl group, whereinalkyl is as defined above. An alkoxy group can be unsubstituted orsubstituted with one or two suitable substituents. Preferably, the alkylchain of an alkyloxy group is from 1 to 6 carbon atoms in length,referred to herein as “(C₁-C₆)alkoxy”.

As used herein, the term “aryloxy group” means an —O-aryl group, whereinaryl is as defined above. An aryloxy group can be unsubstituted orsubstituted with one or two suitable substituents. Preferably, the arylring of an aryloxy group is a monocyclic ring, wherein the ringcomprises 6 carbon atoms, referred to herein as “(C₆)aryloxy”.

As used herein, the term “benzyl” means —CH₂-phenyl.

As used herein, the term “phenyl” means —C₆H₅. A phenyl group can beunsubstituted or substituted with one or two suitable substituents,wherein the substituent replaces an H of the phenyl group. As usedherein, “Ph,” represents a phenyl group or a substituted phenyl group.

As used herein, the term “hydrocarbyl” group means a monovalent groupselected from (C₁-C₈)alkyl, (C₂-C₈)alkenyl, and (C₂-C₈)alkynyl,optionally substituted with one or two suitable substituents.Preferably, the hydrocarbon chain of a hydrocarbyl group is from 1 to 6carbon atoms in length, referred to herein as “(C₁-C₆)hydrocarbyl”.

As used herein, a “carbonyl” group is a divalent group of the formulaC(O).

As used herein, the term “alkoxycarbonyl” group means a monovalent groupof the formula —C(O)-alkoxy. Preferably, the hydrocarbon chain of analkoxycarbonyl group is from 1 to 8 carbon atoms in length, referred toherein as a “lower alkoxycarbonyl” group.

As used herein, a “carbamoyl” group means the radical —C(O)N(R′)₂,wherein R′ is chosen from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, andaryl.

As used herein, “halogen” means fluorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine.Accordingly, the meaning of the terms “halo” and “Hal” encompass fluoro,chloro, bromo, and iodo.

As used herein, a “suitable substituent” means a group that does notnullify the synthetic or pharmaceutical utility of the compounds of theinvention or the intermediates useful for preparing them. Examples ofsuitable substituents include, but are not limited to: (C₁-C₈)alkyl;(C₁-C₈)alkenyl; (C₁-C₈)alkynyl; (C₆)aryl; (C₂-C₅)heteroaryl;(C₃-C₇)cycloalkyl; (C₁-C₈)alkoxy; (C₆)aryloxy; —CN; —OH; oxo; halo,—CO₂H; —NH₂; —NH((C₁-C₈)alkyl); —N((C₁-C₈)alkyl)₂; —NH((C₆)aryl);—N((C₆)aryl)₂; —CHO; —CO((C₁-C₈)alkyl); —CO((C₆)aryl);—CO₂((C₁-C₈)alkyl); and —CO₂((C₆)aryl). One of skill in the art canreadily choose a suitable substituent based on the stability andpharmacological and synthetic activity of the compound of the invention.

As used herein, a composition that is “substantially free” of a compoundmeans that the composition contains less than about 20% by weight, morepreferably less than about 10% by weight, even more preferably less thanabout 5% by weight, and most preferably less than about 3% by weight ofthe compound.

5. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

The compounds of the invention are useful in medical applications fortreating or preventing a variety of diseases and disorders such as, butnot limited to, cardiovascular disease, stroke, and peripheral vasculardisease; dyslipidemia; dyslipoproteinemia; a disorder of glucosemetabolism; Alzheimer's Disease; Parkinson's Disease, diabeticnephropathy, diabetic retinopathy, insulin resistance, metabolicsyndrome disorders (e.g., Syndrome X); a peroxisome proliferatoractivated receptor-associated disorder; septicemia; a thromboticdisorder; obesity; pancreatitis; hypertension; renal disease; cancer;inflammation; inflammatory muscle diseases, such as polymylagiarheumatica, polymyositis, and fibrositis; impotence; gastrointestinaldisease; irritable bowel syndrome; inflammatory bowel disease;inflammatory disorders, such as asthma, vasculitis, ulcerative colitis,Crohn's disease, Kawasaki disease, Wegener's granulomatosis, (RA),systemic lupus erythematosus (SLE), multiple sclerosis (MS), andautoimmune chronic hepatitis; arthritis, such as rheumatoid arthritis,juvenile rheumatoid arthritis, and osteoarthritis; osteoporosis, softtissue rheumatism, such as tendonitis; bursitis; autoimmune disease,such as systemic lupus and erythematosus; scleroderma; ankylosingspondylitis; gout; pseudogout; non-insulin dependent diabetes mellitus;polycystic ovarian disease; hyperlipidemias, such as familialhypercholesterolemia (FH), familial combined hyperlipidemia (FCH);lipoprotein lipase deficiencies, such as hypertriglyceridemia,hypoalphalipoproteinemia, and hypercholesterolemia; lipoproteinabnormalities associated with diabetes; lipoprotein abnormalitiesassociated with obesity; and lipoprotein abnormalities associated withAlzheimer's Disease. The compounds and compositions of the invention areuseful for treatment or prevention of high levels of bloodtriglycerides, high levels of low density lipoprotein cholesterol, highlevels of apolipoprotein B, high levels of lipoprotein Lp(a)cholesterol, high levels of very low density lipoprotein cholesterol,high levels of fibrinogen, high levels of insulin, high levels ofglucose, and low levels of high density lipoprotein cholesterol. Thecompounds and compositions of the invention also have utility fortreatment of NIDDM without increasing weight gain. The compounds of theinvention may also be used to reduce the fat content of meat inlivestock and reduce the cholesterol content of eggs.

The invention provides novel compounds particularly useful for treatingor preventing a variety of diseases and conditions, which include, butare not limited to aging, Alzheimer's Disease, cancer, cardiovasculardisease, diabetic nephropathy, diabetic retinopathy, a disorder ofglucose metabolism, dyslipidemia, dyslipoproteinemia, enhancing bileproduction, hypertension, impotence, inflammation, insulin resistance,lipid elimination in bile, modulating C reactive protein, obesity,oxysterol elimination in bile, pancreatitis, pancreatitius, Parkinson'sdisease, a peroxisome proliferator activated receptor-associateddisorder, phospholipid elimination in bile, renal disease, septicemia,Syndrome X, and a thrombotic disorder.

The invention encompasses compounds of formula I:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate or mixturethereof, wherein:

-   (a) each occurrence of m is independently an integer ranging from 0    to 5;-   (b) each occurrence of n is independently an integer ranging from 3    to 7;-   (c) X is (CH₂)_(z) or Ph, wherein z is an integer from 0 to 4 and Ph    is a 1,2-, 1,3-, or 1,4 substituted phenyl group;-   (d) each occurrence of R¹, R², R¹¹, and R¹² is independently H,    (C₁-C₆)alkyl, (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, (C₂-C₆)alkynyl, phenyl, or benzyl,    wherein R¹, R², R¹¹, and R¹² are not each simultaneously H; and-   (e) each occurrence of Y¹ and Y² is independently (C₁-C₆)alkyl, OH,    COOH, COOR³, SO₃H,

-   -   wherein:        -   (i) Y¹ and Y² are not each simultaneously (C₁-C₆)alkyl;        -   (ii) R³ is (C₁-C₆)alkyl, (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, (C₂-C₆)alkynyl,            phenyl, or benzyl and is unsubstituted or substituted with            one or more halo, OH, (C₁-C₆)alkoxy, or phenyl groups,        -   (iii) each occurrence of R⁴ is independently H,            (C₁-C₆)alkyl, (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, or (C₂-C₆)alkynyl and is            unsubstituted or substituted with one or two halo, OH, C₁-C₆            alkoxy, or phenyl groups; and        -   (iv) each occurrence of R⁵ is independently H, (C₁-C₆)alkyl,            (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, or (C₂-C₆)alkynyl.

Preferably in formula I, each occurrence of Y¹ and Y² is independentlyOH, COOR³, or COOH.

Other preferred compounds of formula I are those wherein m is 0.

Other preferred compounds of formula I are those wherein m is 1.

Other preferred compounds of formula I are those wherein n is 4.

Other preferred compounds of formula I are those wherein n is 5.

Other preferred compounds of formula I are those wherein z is 0.

Other preferred compounds of formula I are those wherein z is 1.

Other preferred compounds of formula I are those wherein Y¹ is(C₁-C₆)alkyl and Y² is OH.

Other preferred compounds of formula I are those wherein Y¹ is methyland Y² is OH.

In another embodiment, the invention encompasses compounds of formulaII:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate, or mixturethereof, wherein:

-   (a) each occurrence of m is independently an integer ranging from 3    to 7;-   (b) each occurrence of n is independently an integer ranging from 0    to 5;-   (c) X is (CH₂)_(z) or Ph, wherein z is an integer from 0 to 4 and Ph    is a 1,2-, 1,3-, or 1,4 substituted phenyl group;-   (d) each occurrence of Y¹ and Y² independently (C₁-C₆)alkyl, OH,    COOH, COOR⁷, SO₃H,

-   -   wherein:        -   (i) R⁷ is (C₁-C₆)alkyl, (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, (C₂-C₆)alkynyl,            phenyl, or benzyl and is unsubstituted or substituted with            one or more halo, OH, (C₁-C₆)alkoxy, or phenyl groups,        -   (ii) each occurrence of R⁸ is independently H, (C₁-C₆)alkyl,            (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, or (C₂-C₆)alkynyl and is unsubstituted or            substituted with one or two halo, OH, C₁-C₆ alkoxy, or            phenyl groups,        -   (iii) each occurrence of R⁹ is independently H,            (C₁-C₆)alkyl, (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, or (C₂-C₆)alkynyl;

-   (e) R³ and R⁴ are (C₁-C₆)alkyl, (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, (C₂-C₆)alkynyl,    phenyl, or benzyl;

-   (f) R⁵ and R⁶ are H, halogen, (C₁-C₄)alkyl, (C₁-C₄)alkoxy,    (C₆)aryloxy, CN, or NO₂, N(R⁵)₂ where R⁵ is H, (C₁-C₄) alkyl,    phenyl, or benzyl;

-   (g) C*¹ and C*² represent independent chiral-carbon centers wherein    each center may independently be R or S.

Exemplary compounds of formula II are those wherein each occurrence ofY¹ and Y² is independently OH, COOR⁷, or COOH.

Other compounds of formula II are those wherein m is 4.

Other compounds of formula II are those wherein m is 5.

Other compounds of formula II are those wherein X is (CH₂)_(z) and z is0.

Other compounds of formula II are those wherein X is (CH₂)_(z) and z is1.

Other compounds of formula II are those wherein Y¹ and/or Y² is C(O)OHor CH₂OH.

Other compounds of formula II are those wherein R³ and R⁴ are eachindependently (C₁-C₆) alkyl.

Other compounds of formula II are those wherein R³ and R⁴ are eachmethyl.

Other compounds of formula II are those wherein C*¹ is of thestereochemical configuration R or substantially R.

Other compounds of formula II are those wherein C*¹ is of thestereochemical configuration S or substantially S.

Other compounds of formula II are those wherein C*² is of thestereochemical configuration R or substantially R.

Other compounds of formula II are those wherein C*² is of thestereochemical configuration S or substantially S.

In a particular embodiment, compounds of formula II are those whereinC*¹ C*² are of the stereochemical configuration (S¹, S²) orsubstantially (S¹, S²).

In another particular embodiment, compounds of formula H are thosewherein C*¹ C*² are of the stereochemical configuration (S¹, R²) orsubstantially (S¹, R²).

In another particular embodiment, compounds of formula II are thosewherein C*¹ C*² are of the stereochemical configuration (R¹, R²) orsubstantially (R¹, R²).

In another particular embodiment, compounds of formula II are thosewherein C*¹ C*² are of the stereochemical configuration (R¹, S²) orsubstantially (R¹, S²).

In another embodiment, the invention encompasses compounds of formulaIII:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate, or mixturethereof, wherein

-   (a) each occurrence of R¹, R², R⁶, R⁷, R¹¹, or R¹² is independently    hydrogen, (C₁-C₆)alkyl, (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, (C₂-C₆)alkynyl, phenyl, or    benzyl;-   (b) each occurrence of n is independently an integer ranging from 1    to 7;-   (c) X is (CH₂)_(z) or Ph, wherein z is an integer from 0 to 4 and Ph    is a 1,2-, 1,3-, or 1,4 substituted phenyl group;-   (d) each occurrence of m is independently an integer ranging from 0    to 4;-   (e) each occurrence of Y¹ and Y² is independently (C₁-C₆)alkyl,    CH₂OH, C(O)OH, OC(O)R³, C(O)OR³, SO₃H,

-   -   wherein:        -   (i) R³ is (C₁-C₆)alkyl, (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, (C₂-C₆)alkynyl,            phenyl, or benzyl and is unsubstituted or substituted with            one or more halo, OH, (C₁-C₆)alkoxy, or phenyl groups,        -   (ii) each occurrence of R⁴ is independently H, (C₁-C₆)alkyl,            (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, or (C₂-C₆)alkynyl and is unsubstituted or            substituted with one or two halo, OH, C₁-C₆ alkoxy, or            phenyl groups;        -   (iii) each occurrence of R⁵ is independently H,            (C₁-C₆)alkyl, (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, or (C₂-C₆)alkynyl; and

-   (f) b is 0 or 1 and optionally the ring contains the presence of one    or more additional carbon-carbon bonds that when present complete    one or more carbon-carbon double bonds such that when b is 0 the    maximum number of carbon-carbon bonds is two or when b is 1 the    maximum number of carbon-carbon bonds is three.

In another embodiment, the invention encompasses compounds of formulaIV:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate, or mixturethereof, wherein

-   (a) each occurrence of R¹, R², R⁶, R⁷, R¹¹, or R¹² is independently    H, (C₁-C₆)alkyl, (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, (C₂-C₆)alkynyl, phenyl, or benzyl;-   (b) each occurrence of n is independently an integer ranging from 1    to 7;-   (c) X is (CH₂)_(Z) or Ph, wherein z is an integer from 0 to 4 and Ph    is a 1,2-, 1,3-, or 1,4 substituted phenyl group;-   (d) each occurrence of m is independently an integer ranging from 0    to 4;-   (e) each occurrence of Y¹ and Y² is independently (C₁-C₆)alkyl,    CH₂OH, C(O)OH, OC(O)R³, C(O)OR³, SO₃H,

-   -   wherein:        -   (i) R³ is (C₁-C₆)alkyl, (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, (C₂-C₆)alkynyl,            phenyl, or benzyl and is unsubstituted or substituted with            one or more halo, OH, (C₁-C₆)alkoxy, or phenyl groups,        -   (ii) each occurrence of R⁴ is independently H, (C₁-C₆)alkyl,            (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, or (C₂-C₆)alkynyl and is unsubstituted or            substituted with one or two halo, OH, C₁-C₆ alkoxy, or            phenyl groups;        -   (iii) each occurrence of R⁵ is independently H,            (C₁-C₆)alkyl, (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, or (C₂-C₆)alkynyl; and

-   (f) each occurrence of b is independently 0 or 1 and optionally each    of the rings independently contains the presence of one or more    additional carbon-carbon bonds that when present complete one or    more carbon-carbon double bonds such that when b is 0 the maximum    number of carbon-carbon bonds is two or when b is 1 the maximum    number of carbon-carbon bonds is three.

In another embodiment, the invention encompasses compounds of formula V:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate, or mixturethereof, wherein

-   (a) each occurrence of R¹, R², R⁶, R⁷, R¹¹, or R¹² is independently    hydrogen, (C₁-C₆)alkyl, (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, (C₂-C₆)alkynyl, phenyl, or    benyl;-   (b) each occurrence of n is independently an integer ranging from 1    to 7;-   (c) X is (CH₂)_(z) or Ph, wherein z is an integer from 0 to 4 and Ph    is a 1,2-, 1,3-, or 1,4 substituted phenyl group;-   (d) each occurrence of m is independently an integer ranging from 0    to 4;-   (e) each occurrence of Y¹ and Y² is independently (C₁-C₆)alkyl,    CH₂OH, C(O)OH, OC(O)R³, C(O)OR³, SO₃H,

-   -   wherein:        -   (i) R³ is (C₁-C₆)alkyl, (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, (C₂-C₆)alkynyl,            phenyl, or benzyl and is unsubstituted or substituted with            one or more halo, OH, (C₁-C₆)alkoxy, or phenyl groups,        -   (ii) each occurrence of R⁴ is independently H, (C₁-C₆)alkyl,            (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, or (C₂-C₆)alkynyl and is unsubstituted or            substituted with one or two halo, OH, C₁-C₆ alkoxy, or            phenyl groups;        -   (iii) each occurrence of R⁵ is independently H,            (C₁-C₆)alkyl, (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, or (C₂-C₆)alkynyl; and

-   (f) b is 0 or 1 and optionally the ring contains one or more    carbon-carbon bonds that when present complete one or more    carbon-carbon double bonds.

In another embodiment, the invention encompasses compounds of theformula VI:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate, or mixturethereof, wherein:

-   (a) each occurrence of R¹, R², R⁶, R⁷, R¹¹, or R¹² is independently    hydrogen, (C₁-C₆)alkyl, (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, (C₂-C₆)alkynyl, phenyl, or    benzyl;-   (b) each occurrence of n is independently an integer ranging from 1    to 7;-   (c) X is (CH₂)_(z) or Ph, wherein z is an integer from 0 to 4 and Ph    is a 1,2-, 1,3-, or 1,4 substituted phenyl group;-   (d) each occurrence of m is independently an integer ranging from 0    to 4;-   (e) each occurrence of Y¹ and Y² is independently (C₁-C₆)alkyl,    CH₂OH, C(O)OH, OC(O)R³, C(O)OR³, SO₃H,

-   -   wherein:        -   (i) R³ is (C₁-C₆)alkyl, (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, (C₂-C₆)alkynyl,            phenyl, or benzyl and is unsubstituted or substituted with            one or more halo, OH, (C₁-C₆)alkoxy, or phenyl groups,        -   (ii) each occurrence of R⁴ is independently H, (C₁-C₆)alkyl,            (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, or (C₂-C₆)alkynyl and is unsubstituted or            substituted with one or two halo, OH, C₁-C₆ alkoxy, or            phenyl groups; and        -   (iii) each occurrence of R⁵ is independently H,            (C₁-C₆)alkyl, (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, or (C₂-C₆)alkynyl; and

-   (f) b is 0 or 1 and optionally the ring contains one or more    carbon-carbon bonds that when present complete one or more    carbon-carbon double bonds.

In another embodiment, the invention encompasses compounds of theformula VII:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate, or mixturethereof, wherein

-   (a) Z is CH₂, CH═CH, or phenyl, where each occurrence of m is    independently an integer ranging from 1 to 9, but when Z is phenyl    then its associated m is 1;-   (b) G is (CH₂)_(x), where x is 1, 2, 3, or 4, CH₂CH═CHCH₂, CH═CH,    CH₂-phenyl-CH₂, or phenyl;-   (c) each occurrence of Y¹ and Y² is independently L, V,    C(R¹)(R²)—(CH₂)c-C(R³)(R⁴)—(CH₂)n-Y, or C(R¹)(R²)—(CH₂)c-V where c    is 1 or 2 and n is an integer ranging from 0 to 4; when G is    (CH₂)_(x), where x is 1, 2, 3, or 4, W² is CH₃;-   (d) each occurrence of R¹ or R² is independently (C₁-C₆)alkyl,    (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, (C₂-C₆)alkynyl, phenyl, or benzyl or when one or    both of Y¹ and Y² is C(R¹)(R²)—(CH₂)c-C(R³)(R⁴)—(CH₂)n-W, then R¹    and R² can both be H to form a methylene group;-   (e) R³ is H, (C₁-C₆)alkyl, (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, (C₁-C₆)alkynyl,    (C₁-C₆)alkoxy, phenyl, benzyl, Cl, Br, CN, NO₂, or CF₃;-   (f) R⁴ is OH, (C₁-C₆)alkyl, (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, (C₂-C₆)alkynyl,    (C₁-C₆)alkoxy, phenyl, benzyl, Cl, Br, CN, NO₂, or CF₃;-   (g) L is C(R¹)(R²)—(CH₂)n-W;-   (h) V is:

-   (i) each occurrence of W is independently OH, COOH, CHO, COOR⁵,    SO₃H,

-   -   wherein:        -   (i) R⁵ is (C₁-C₆)alkyl, (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, (C₂-C₆)alkynyl,            phenyl, or benzyl and is unsubstituted or substituted with            one or more halo, OH, (C₁-C₆)alkoxy, or phenyl groups,        -   (ii) each occurrence of R⁶ is independently H, (C₁-C₆)alkyl,            (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, or (C₂-C₆)alkynyl and is unsubstituted or            substituted with one or two halo, OH, (C₁-C₆) alkoxy, or            phenyl groups;        -   (iii) each occurrence of R⁷ is independently H,            (C₁-C₆)alkyl, (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, or (C₂-C₆)alkynyl; and

-   (j) X is (CH₂)_(z) or PH, wherein z is an integer from 0 to 4.

In a particular embodiment, the invention encompasses compounds of theformula VIII:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate, or mixturethereof, wherein

-   (a) Z is CH₂, CH═CH, or phenyl, where each occurrence of m is    independently an integer ranging from 1 to 9, but when Z is phenyl    then its associated m is 1;-   (b) G is (CH₂)_(x), where x is 1, 2, 3, or 4, CH₂CH═CHCH₂, CH═CH,    CH₂-phenyl-CH₂, or phenyl;-   (c) each occurrence of Y¹ and Y² is independently L, V,    C(R¹)(R²)—(CH₂)c-C(R³)(R⁴)—(CH₂)n-Y, or C(R¹)(R²)—(CH₂)c-V where c    is 1 or 2 and n is an integer ranging from 0 to 4; when G is    (CH₂)_(x), where x is 1, 2, 3, or 4, W² is CH₃;-   (d) each occurrence of R¹ or R² is independently (C₁-C₆)alkyl,    (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, (C₂₋C₆)alkynyl, phenyl, or benzyl or when one or    both of Y¹ and Y² is C(R¹)(R²)—(CH₂)c-C(R³)(R⁴)—(CH₂)n-W, then R¹    and R² can both be H to form a methylene group;-   (e) R³ is H, (C₁-C₆)alkyl, (C₁-C₆)alkenyl, (C₁-C₆)alkynyl,    (C₁-C₆)alkoxy, phenyl, benzyl, Cl, Br, CN, NO₂, or CF₃;-   (f) R⁴ is OH, (C₁-C₆)alkyl, (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, (C₁-C₆)alkynyl,    (C₁-C₆)alkoxy, phenyl, benzyl, Cl, Br, CN, NO₂, or CF₃;-   (g) L is C(R¹)(R²)—(CH₂)n-W;-   (h) V is:

-   (i) each occurrence of W is independently OH, COOH, CHO, COOR⁵,    SO₃H,

-   -   wherein:        -   (i) R⁵ is (C₁-C₆)alkyl, (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, (C₂-C₆)alkynyl,            phenyl, or benzyl and is unsubstituted or substituted with            one or more halo, OH, (C₁-C₆)alkoxy, or phenyl groups,        -   (ii) each occurrence of R⁶ is independently H, (C₁-C₆)alkyl,            (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, or (C₂-C₆)alkynyl and is unsubstituted or            substituted with one or two halo, OH, (C₁-C₆) alkoxy, or            phenyl groups; and        -   (iii) each occurrence of R⁷ is independently H,            (C₁-C₆)alkyl, (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, or (C₂-C₆)alkynyl.

In another particular embodiment, the invention encompasses compounds offormula IX:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate, or mixturethereof, wherein

-   (a) Z is CH₂, CH═CH, or phenyl, where each occurrence of m is    independently an integer ranging from 1 to 9, but when Z is phenyl    then its associated m is 1;-   (b) G is (CH₂)_(x), where x is 1, 2, 3, or 4, CH₂CH═CHCH₂, CH═CH,    CH₂-phenyl-CH₂, or phenyl;-   (c) each occurrence of Y¹ and Y² is independently L, V,    C(R¹)(R²)—(CH₂)c-C(R³)(R⁴)—(CH₂)n-Y, or C(R¹)(R²)—(CH₂)c-V where c    is 1 or 2 and n is an integer ranging from 0 to 4; when G is    (CH₂)_(x), where x is 1, 2, 3, or 4, W² is CH₃;-   (d) each occurrence of R¹ or R² is independently (C₁-C₆)alkyl,    (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, (C₂-C₆)alkynyl, phenyl, or benzyl or when one or    both of Y¹ and Y² is C(R¹)(R²)—(CH₂)c-C(R³)(R⁴)—(CH₂)n-W, then R¹    and R² can both be H to form a methylene group;-   (e) R³ is H, (C₁-C₆)alkyl, (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, (C₂-C₆)alkynyl,    (C₁-C₆)alkoxy, phenyl, benzyl, Cl, Br, CN, NO₂, or CF₃;-   (f) R⁴ is OH, (C₁-C₆)alkyl, (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, (C₂-C₆)alkynyl,    (C₁-C₆)alkoxy, phenyl, benzyl, Cl, Br, CN, NO₂, or CF₃;-   (g) L is C(R¹)(R²)—(CH₂)n-W;-   (h) V is:

-   (i) each occurrence of W is independently OH, COOH, CHO, COOR⁵,    SO₃H,

-   -   wherein:        -   (i) R⁵ is (C₁-C₆)alkyl, (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, (C₁-C₆)alkynyl,            phenyl, or benzyl and is unsubstituted or substituted with            one or more halo, OH, (C₁-C₆)alkoxy, or phenyl groups,        -   (ii) each occurrence of R⁶ is independently H, (C₁-C₆)alkyl,            (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, or (C₂-C₆)alkynyl and is unsubstituted or            substituted with one or two halo, OH, (C₁-C₆) alkoxy, or            phenyl groups; and        -   (iii) each occurrence of R⁷ is independently H,            (C₁-C₆)alkyl, (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, or (C₂-C₆)alkynyl.

The present invention further provides pharmaceutical compositionscomprising one or more compounds of the invention. Particularpharmaceutical compositions further comprise pharmaceutically acceptablevehicle, which can comprise a carrier, excipient, diluent, or a mixturethereof.

The present invention provides a method for treating or preventingaging, Alzheimer's Disease, cancer, cardiovascular disease, diabeticnephropathy, diabetic retinopathy, a disorder of glucose metabolism,dyslipidemia, dyslipoproteinemia, enhancing bile production, enhancingreverse lipid transport, hypertension, impotence, inflammation, insulinresistance, lipid elimination in bile, modulating C reactive protein,obesity, oxysterol elimination in bile, pancreatitis, pancreatitius,Parkinson's disease, a peroxisome proliferator activatedreceptor-associated disorder, phospholipid elimination in bile, renaldisease, septicemia, metabolic syndrome disorders (e.g., Syndrome X),and a thrombotic disorder, comprising administering to a patient in needof such treatment or prevention a therapeutically effective amount of acompound of the invention.

The present invention further provides a method for reducing the fatcontent of meat in livestock comprising administering to livestock inneed of such fat-content reduction a therapeutically effective amount ofa compound of the invention or a pharmaceutical composition.

The present invention provides a method for reducing the cholesterolcontent of a fowl egg comprising administering to a fowl species atherapeutically effective amount of a compound of the invention.

The compounds of the invention are particularly useful when incorporatedin a pharmaceutical composition comprising a carrier, excipient,diluent, or a mixture thereof. However, a compound of the invention neednot be administered with excipients or diluents and can be delivered ina gel cap or drug delivery device.

In certain embodiments of the invention, a compound of the invention isadministered in combination with another therapeutic agent. The othertherapeutic agent provides additive or synergistic value relative to theadministration of a compound of the invention alone. Examples of othertherapeutic agents include, but are not limited to, a lovastatin; athiazolidinedione or fibrate; a bile-acid-binding-resin; a niacin; ananti-obesity drug; a hormone; a tyrophostine; a sulfonylurea-based drug;a biguanide; an α-glucosidase inhibitor; an apolipoprotein A-I agonist;apolipoprotein E; a cardiovascular drug; an HDL-raising drug; an HDLenhancer; or a regulator of the apolipoprotein A-I, apolipoprotein A-IVand/or apolipoprotein genes.

Illustrative examples of compounds of the invention are encompassed byformulas I-IX and include those shown below, and pharmaceuticallyacceptable salts, hydrates, enantiomers, diastereomers, and geometricisomers thereof:

5.1 Synthesis of the Compounds of the Invention

The compounds of the invention can be obtained via the syntheticmethodology illustrated in Schemes 1-20. Starting materials useful forpreparing the compounds of the invention and intermediates thereof, arecommercially available or can be prepared from commercially availablematerials using known synthetic methods and reagents.

Scheme 1 illustrates the synthesis of mono-protected diols of theformula X, wherein n is an integer ranging from 0 to 4 and R¹ and R² areas defined herein, and E is a leaving group as defined herein. Scheme 1first outlines the synthesis of mono-protected diols X, wherein n is 0,where esters 4 are successively reacted with a first ((R¹)_(p−)M) then asecond ((R²)_(p−)M) organometallic reagent providing hydroxys 5 andalcohols 6, respectively. M is a metal group and p is the metal'svalency value (e.g., the valency of Li is 1 and that of Zn is 2).Suitable metals include, but are not limited to, Zn, Na, Li, and—Mg-Hal, wherein Hal is a halide selected from iodo, bromo, or chloro.Preferably, M is —Mg-Hal, in which case the organometallic reagents,(R¹)_(p−)Mg-Hal and (R²)_(p−)Mg-Hal, are known in the art as a Grignardreagents. Esters 4 are available commercially (e.g., Aldrich ChemicalCo., Milwaukee, Wis.) or can be prepared by well-known syntheticmethods, for example, via esterification of the appropriate5-halovaleric acid (commercially available, e.g., Aldrich Chemical Co.,Milwaukee, Wis.). Both (R¹)_(p−)M and (R²)_(p−)M are availablecommercially (e.g., Aldrich Chemical Co., Milwaukee, Wis.) or can beprepared by well-known methods (see e.g., Kharasch et al., GrignardReactions of Non-Metallic Substances; Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs,N.J., pp. 138-528 (1954) and Hartley; Patai, The Chemistry of theMetal-Carbon Bond, Vol. 4, Wiley: New York, pp. 159-306 and pp. 162-175(1989), both citations are hereby expressly incorporated herein byreference). The reaction of a first ((R¹)_(p−)M) then a second((R²)_(p−)M) organometallic reagent with esters 4 can be performed usingthe general procedures referenced in March, J. Advanced OrganicChemistry; Reactions Mechanisms, and Structure, 4th ed., 1992, pp.920-929 and Eicher, Patai, The Chemistry of the Carbonyl Group, pt. 1,pp. 621-693; Wiley: New York, (1966), hereby expressly incorporatedherein by reference. For example, the synthetic procedure described inComins et al., 1981, Tetrahedron Lett. 22:1085, hereby expresslyincorporated herein by reference, can be used. As one example, thereaction can be performed by adding an organic solution of (R¹)_(p−)M(about 0.5 to about 1 equivalents) to a stirred, cooled (about 0° C. toabout −80° C.) solution comprising esters 4, under an inert atmosphere(e.g., nitrogen) to give a reaction mixture comprising ketones 5.Preferably, (R¹)_(p−)M is added at a rate such that the reaction-mixturetemperature remains within about one to two degrees of the initialreaction-mixture temperature. The progress of the reaction can befollowed by using an appropriate analytical method, such as thin-layerchromatography or high-performance-liquid chromatography. Next, anorganic solution of (R²)_(p−)M (about 0.5 to about 1 equivalent) isadded to the reaction mixture comprising ketones 5 in the same mannerused to add (R¹)_(p−)M. After the reaction providing alcohols 6 issubstantially complete, the reaction mixture can be quenched and theproduct can be isolated by workup. Suitable solvents for obtainingalcohols 6 include, but are not limited to, dichloromethane, diethylether, tetrahydrofuran, benzene, toluene, xylene, hydrocarbon solvents(e.g., pentane, hexane, and heptane), and mixtures thereof. Preferably,the organic solvent is diethyl ether or tetrahydrofuran. Next, alcohols6 are converted to mono-protected diols X, wherein n is 0, using thewell-known Williamson ether synthesis. This involves reacting alcohols 6with —O-PG, wherein -PG is a hydroxy-protecting group. For a generaldiscussion of the Williamson ether synthesis, See March, J. AdvancedOrganic Chemistry; Reactions Mechanisms, and Structure, 4th ed., 1992,pp. 386-387, and for a list of procedures and reagents useful in theWilliamson ether synthesis, See, for example, Larock ComprehensiveOrganic Transformations; VCH: New York, 1989, pp. 446-448, both of whichreferences are incorporated herein by reference. As used herein, theterm “hydroxy-protecting group” means a group that is reversiblyattached to a hydroxy moiety that renders the hydroxy moiety unreactiveduring a subsequent reaction(s) and that can be selectively cleaved toregenerate the hydroxy moiety once its protecting purpose has beenserved. Examples of hydroxy-protecting groups are found in Greene, T.W., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 3rd edition 17-237 (1999),hereby expressly incorporated herein by reference. Preferably, thehydroxy-protecting group is stable in a basic reaction medium, but canbe cleaved by acid. Examples of suitable base-stable acid-labilehydroxy-protecting groups suitable for use with the invention include,but are not limited to, ethers, such as methyl, methoxy methyl,methylthiomethyl, methoxyethoxymethyl, bis(2-chloroethoxy)methyl,tetrahydropyranyl, tetrahydrothiopyranyl, tetrahyrofuranyl,tetrahydrothiofuranyl, 1-ethoxyethyl, 1-methyl-1-methoxyethyl, t-butyl,allyl, benzyl, o-nitrobenzyl, triphenylmethyl, α-naphthyldiphenylmethyl,p-methoxyphenyldiphenylmethyl, 9-(9-phenyl-10-oxo)anthranyl,trimethylsilyl, isopropyldimethylsilyl, t-butyldimethylsilyl,t-butyldiphcnylsilyl, tribenzylsilyl, and triisopropylsilyl; and esters,such as pivaloate, adamantoate, and 2,4,6-trimethylbenzoate. Ethers arepreferred, particularly straight chain ethers, such as methyl ether,methoxymethyl ether, methylthiomethyl ether, methoxyethoxymethyl ether,bis(2-chloroethoxy)methyl ether. Preferably -PG is methoxymethyl(CH₃OCH²⁻). Reaction of alcohols 6 with —O-PG under the conditions ofthe Williamson ether synthesis involves adding a base to a stirredorganic solution comprising HO-PG (e.g., methoxymethanol), maintained ata constant temperature within the range of about 0° C. to about 80° C.,preferably at about room temperature. Preferably, the base is added at arate such that the reaction-mixture temperature remains within about oneto two degrees of the initial reaction-mixture temperature. The base canbe added as an organic solution or in undiluted form. Preferably, thebase will have a base strength sufficient to deprotonate a proton,wherein the proton has a pK_(a) of greater than about 15, preferablygreater than about 20. As is well known in the art, the pK_(a) is ameasure of the acidity of an acid H-A, according to the equationpK_(a)=−log K_(a), wherein K_(a) is the equilibrium constant for theproton transfer. The acidity of an acid H-A is proportional to thestability of its conjugate base -A. For tables listing pK_(a) values forvarious organic acids and a discussion on pK_(a) measurement, see March,J. Advanced Organic Chemistry; Reactions Mechanisms, and Structure, 4thed., 1992, pp. 248-272, incorporated herein by reference. Suitable basesinclude, but are not limited to, alkylmetal bases such as methyllithium,n-butyllithium, tert-butyllithium, sec-butyllithium, phenyllithium,phenyl sodium, and phenyl potassium; metal amide bases such as lithiumamide, sodium amide, potassium amide, lithium tetramethylpiperidide,lithium diisopropylamide, lithium diethylamide, lithiumdicyclohexylamide, sodium hexamethyldisilazide, and lithiumhexamethyldisilazide; and hydride bases such as sodium hydride andpotassium hydride. The preferred base is lithium diisopropylamide.Solvents suitable for reacting alcohols 6 with —OPG include, but are notlimited, to dimethyl sulfoxide, dichloromethane, ethers, and mixturesthereof, preferably tetrahydrofuran. After addition of the base, thereaction mixture can be adjusted to within a temperature range of about0° C. to about room temperature and alcohols 6 can be added, preferablyat a rate such that the reaction-mixture temperature remains withinabout one to two degrees of the initial reaction-mixture temperature.Alcohols 6 can be diluted in an organic solvent or added in theirundiluted form. The resulting reaction mixture is stirred until thereaction is substantially complete as determined by using an appropriateanalytical method, preferably by gas chromatography, then themono-protected diols X can be isolated by workup and purification.

Next, Scheme 1 outlines a method useful for synthesizing mono-protecteddiols X, wherein n is 1. First, compounds 7, wherein E is a suitableleaving group, are reacted with compounds 8, wherein R¹ and R² are asdefined above and R⁸ is H, (C₁-C₆)alkyl or (C₆)aryl, providing compounds9. Suitable leaving groups are well known in the art, for example, butnot limited to halides, such as chloride, bromide, and iodide; aryl- oralkylsulfonyloxy, substituted arylsulfonyloxy (e.g., tosyloxy ormesyloxy); substituted alkylsulfonyloxy (e.g., haloalkylsulfonyloxy);(C₆)aryloxy or substituted (C₆)aryloxy; and acyloxy groups. Compounds 7are available commercially (e.g., Aldrich Chemical Co., Milwaukee, Wis.)or can be prepared by well-known methods such as halogenation orsulfonation of butanediol. Compounds 8 are also available commercially(e.g., Aldrich Chemical Co., Milwaukee, Wis.) or by well-known methods,such as those listed in Larock Comprehensive Organic Transformations;Wiley-VCH: New York, 1999, pp. 1754-1755 and 1765. A review onalkylation of esters of type 8 is given by J. Mulzer in ComprehensiveOrganic Functional Transformations, Pergamon, Oxford 1995, pp. 148-151and exemplary synthetic procedures for reacting compounds 7 withcompounds 8 are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,648,387, column 6 andAckerly, et al., J. Med. Chem. 1995, pp. 1608, all of which citationsare hereby expressly incorporated herein by reference. The reactionrequires the presence of a suitable base. Preferably, a suitable basewill have a pK_(a) of greater than about 25, more preferably greaterthan about 30. Suitable bases include, but are not limited to,alkylmetal bases such as methyllithium, n-butyllithium,tert-butyllithium, sec-butyllithium, phenyllithium, phenyl sodium, andphenyl potassium; metal amide bases such as lithium amide, sodium amide,potassium amide, lithium tetramethylpiperidide, lithiumdiisopropylamide, lithium diethylamide, lithium dicyclohexylamide,sodium hexamethyldisilazide, and lithium hexamethyldisilazide; hydridebases such as sodium hydride and potassium hydride. Metal amide bases,such as lithium diisopropylamide are preferred. Preferably, to reactcompounds 7 with compounds 8, a solution of about 1 to about 2equivalents of a suitable base is added to a stirred solution comprisingesters 8 and a suitable organic solvent, under an inert atmosphere, thesolution maintained at a constant temperature within the range of about−95° C. to about room temperature, preferably at about −78° C. to about−20° C. Preferably, the base is diluted in a suitable organic solventbefore addition. Preferably, the base is added at a rate of about 1.5moles per hour. Organic solvents suitable for the reaction of compounds7 with the compounds 8 include, but are not limited to, dichloromethane,diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide,benzene, toluene, xylene, hydrocarbon solvents (e.g., pentane, hexane,and heptane), and mixtures thereof. After addition of the base, thereaction mixture is allowed to stir for about 1 to about 2 hours, and acompound 7, preferably dissolved in a suitable organic solvent, isadded, preferably at a rate such that the reaction-mixture temperatureremains within about one to two degrees of the initial reaction-mixturetemperature. After addition of compounds 7, the reaction-mixturetemperature can be adjusted to within a temperature range of about −20°C. to about room temperature, preferably to about room temperature, andthe reaction mixture is allowed to stir until the reaction issubstantially complete as determined by using an appropriated analyticalmethod, preferably thin-layer chromatography or high-performance liquidchromatography. Then the reaction mixture is quenched and compounds 9,wherein n is 1 can be isolated by workup. Compounds 10 are thensynthesized by reacting compounds 9 with —O-PG according to the protocoldescribed above for reacting alcohols 6 with —O-PG. Next, compounds 10can be converted to mono-protected diols X, wherein n is 1, by reductionof the ester group of compounds 10 to an alcohol group with a suitablereducing agent. A wide variety of reagents are available for reductionof such esters to alcohols, e.g., see M. Hudlicky, Reductions in OrganicChemistry, 2nd ed., 1996 pp. 212-217, hereby expressly incorporatedherein by reference. Preferably, the reduction is effected with ahydride type reducing agent, for example, lithium aluminum hydride,lithium borohydride, lithium triethyl borohydride, diisobutylaluminumhydride, lithium trimethoxyaluminum hydride, or sodiumbis(2-methoxy)aluminum hydride. For exemplary procedures for reducingesters to alcohols, see Nystrom et al., 1947, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 69:1197;and Moffet et al., 1963, Org. Synth., Collect. 834(4), lithium aluminumhydride; Brown et al., 1965, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 87:5614, lithiumtrimethoxyaluminum hydride; Cerny et al., 1969, Collect. Czech. Chem.Commun. 34:1025, sodium bis(2-methoxy)aluminum hydride; Nystrom et al.,1949, J. Am. Chem. 71:245, lithium borohydride; and Brown et al., 1980,J. Org. Chem. 45:1, lithium triethyl borohydride, all of which citationsare hereby expressly incorporated herein by reference. Preferably, thereduction is conducted by adding an organic solution of compounds 10 toa stirred mixture comprising a reducing agent, preferably lithiumaluminum hydride, and an organic solvent. During the addition, thereaction mixture is maintained at a constant temperature within therange of about −20° C. to about 80° C., preferably at about roomtemperature. Organic solvents suitable for reacting 9 with —OPG include,but are not limited to, dichloromethane, diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuranor mixtures thereof, preferably tetrahydrofuran. After the addition, thereaction mixture is stirred at a constant temperature within the rangeof about room temperature to about 60° C., until the reaction issubstantially complete as determined by using an appropriate analyticalmethod, preferably thin-layer chromatography or high-performance-liquidchromatography. Then the reaction mixture can be quenched andmono-protected diols X, wherein n is 1, can be isolated by workup andpurification.

Scheme 1 next illustrates a three step synthetic sequence forhomologating mono-protected diols X comprising: (a) halogenation(converting —CH₂OH to —CH²⁻Hal); (b) carbonylation (replacing -Hal with—CHO); and (c) reduction (converting —CHO to —CH₂OH), wherein a reactionsequence of (a), (b), and (c) increases the value of n by 1. In step (a)protected halo-alcohols 11, wherein Hal is a halide selected from thegroup of chloro, bromo, or iodo, preferably iodo, can be prepared byhalogenating mono-protected diols X, by using well-known methods (for adiscussion of various methods for conversion of alcohols to halides seeMarch, J. Advanced Organic Chemistry; Reactions Mechanisms, andStructure, 4th ed., 1992, pp. 431-433, hereby expressly incorporatedherein by reference). For example, protected iodo-alcohols 11 can besynthesized starting from mono-protected diols X by treatment withPh/I₂/imidazole (Garegg et al., 1980, J.C.S Perkin I 2866);1,2-dipheneylene phosphorochloridite/I₂ (Corey et al., 1967, J. Org.Chem. 82:4160); or preferably with Me₃SiCl/NaI (Olah et al., 1979, J.Org. Chem. 44:8, 1247), all of which citations are hereby expresslyincorporated herein by reference. Step (b); carbonylation of alkylhalides, such as protected halo-alcohols 11, is reviewed in Olah et al.,1987, Chem Rev. 87:4, 671; and March, J., Advanced Organic Chemistry;Reactions Mechanisms, and Structure, 4th ed., 1992, pp. 483-484, both ofwhich are hereby expressly incorporated herein by reference). Protectedhalo-alcohols 11 can be carbonylated with Li(BF₃.Et₂O)/HCONMe₂ using theprocedure described in Maddaford et al., 1993, J. Org. Chem. 58:4132;Becker et al., 1982, J. Org. Chem. 3297; or Myers et al., 1992, J. Am.Chem. Soc. 114:9369 or, alternatively, with anorganometallic/N-formylmorpholine using the procedure described in Olahet al., 1984, J. Org. Chem. 49:3856 or Vogtle et al., 1987, J. Org.Chem. 52:5560, all of which citations are hereby expressly incorporatedherein by reference. The method described in Olah et al., 1984, J. Org.Chem. 49:3856 is preferred. Reduction step (c) useful for synthesizingmono-protected diols X from aldehydes 12, can be accomplished bywell-known methods in the art for reduction of aldehydes to thecorresponding alcohols (for a discussion see M. Hudlicky, Reductions inOrganic Chemistry, 2nd ed., 1996 pp 137-139), for example, by catalytichydrogenation (see e.g., Carothers, 1949, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 46:1675) or,preferably by reacting aldehydes 12 with a hydride reducing agent, suchas lithium aluminum hydride, lithium borohydride, sodium borohydride(see e.g., the procedures described in Chaikin et al., 1949, J. Am.Chem. Soc. 21:3245; Nystrom et al., 1947, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 69: 1197;and Nystrom et al., 1949, J. Am. Chem. 71:3245, all of which are herebyexpressly incorporated herein by reference). Reduction with lithiumaluminum hydride is preferred.

Scheme 2 outlines the method for the synthesis of protected alcohols 12awherein Y, R¹, R², Z, and m are defined as above. Protected alcohols 12acorrespond to compounds of the formula W⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾-Zm-OPG, wherein W(R¹)(R²)is C(R¹)(R²)—Y.

Protected alcohols 16, wherein Y comprises a —C(O)OH group, can besynthesized by oxidizing mono-protected diols X with an agent suitablefor oxidizing a primary alcohol to a carboxylic acid (for a discussionsee M. Hudlicky, Oxidations in Organic Chemistry, ACS Monograph 186,1990, pp. 127-130, hereby expressly incorporated herein by reference).Suitable oxidizing agents include, but are not limited to, pyridiniumdichromate (Corey et al., 1979, Tetrahedron Lett. 399); manganesedioxide (Ahrens et al., 1967, J. Heterocycl. Chem. 4:625); sodiumpermanganate monohydrate (Menger et al., 1981, Tetrahedron Lett.22:1655); and potassium permanganate (Sam et al., 1972, J. Am. Chem.Soc. 94:4024), all of which citations are hereby expressly incorporatedherein by reference. The preferred oxidizing reagent is pyridiniumdichromate. In an alternative synthetic procedure, protected alcohols16, wherein Y comprises a —C(O)OH group, can be synthesized by treatmentof protected halo-alcohols 15, wherein X is iodo, with CO or CO₂, asdescribed in Bailey et al., 1990, J. Org. Chem. 55:5404 and Yanagisawaet al., 1994, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 116:6130, the two of which citations arehereby expressly incorporated herein by reference. Protected alcohols16, wherein Y comprises —C(O)OR⁵, wherein R⁵ is as defined above, can besynthesized by oxidation of mono-protected diols X in the presence ofR⁵OH (see generally, March, J. Advanced Organic Chemistry; ReactionsMechanisms, and Structure, 4th ed., 1992, p. 1196). An exemplaryprocedure for such an oxidation is described in Stevens et al., 1982,Tetrahedron Lett. 23:4647 (HOCL); Sundararaman et al., 1978, TetrahedronLett. 1627 (O₃/KOH); Wilson et al., 1982, J. Org. Chem. 42:1360(t-BuOOH/Et₃N); and Williams et al., 1988, Tetrahedron Lett. 29:5087(Br₂), the four of which citations are hereby expressly incorporatedherein by reference. Preferably, protected alcohols 16, wherein Ycomprises a —C(O)OR⁵ group are synthesized from the correspondingcarboxylic acid (i.e., 16, wherein Y comprises —C(O)OH) byesterification with R⁵OH (e.g., see March, J., Advanced OrganicChemistry; Reactions Mechanisms, and Structure, 4th ed., 1992, p.393-394, hereby expressly incorporated herein by reference). In anotheralternative synthesis, protected alcohols 16, wherein Y comprises—C(O)OR⁵, can be prepared from protected halo-alcohols 14 bycarbonylation with transition metal complexes (see e.g., March, J.Advanced Organic Chemistry; Reactions Mechanisms, and Structure, 4thed., 1992, p. 484-486; Urata et al., 1991, Tetrahedron Lett. 32:36,4733); and Ogata et al., 1969, J. Org. Chem. 3985 the three of whichcitations are hereby expressly incorporated herein by reference).

Protected alcohols 16, wherein Y comprises —OC(O)R⁵, wherein R⁵ is asdefined above, can be prepared by acylation of mono-protected diols Xwith a carboxylate equivalent such as an acyl halide (i.e., R⁵C(O)—Hal,wherein Hal is iodo, bromo, or chloro, see e.g., March, J. AdvancedOrganic Chemistry; Reactions Mechanisms, and Structure, 4th ed., 1992,p. 392 and Org. Synth. Coll. Vol. III, Wiley, N.Y., pp. 142, 144, 167,and 187 (1955)) or an anhydride (i.e., R⁵C(O)—O—(O)CR⁵, see e.g., March,J. Advanced Organic Chemistry; Reactions Mechanisms, and Structure, 4thed., 1992, p. 392-393 and Org. Synth. Coll. Vol. II, Wiley, N.Y., pp.11, 127, 141, 169, 237, 281, 428, 432, 690, and 833 (1955), all of whichcitations are hereby expressly incorporated herein by reference).Preferably, the reaction is conducted by adding a base to a solutioncomprising mono-protected diols X, a carboxylate equivalent, and anorganic solvent, which solution is preferably maintained at a constanttemperature within the range of 0° C. to about room temperature.Solvents suitable for reacting mono-protected diols X with a carboxylateequivalent include, but are not limited to, dichloromethane, toluene,and ether, preferably dichloromethane. Suitable bases include, but arenot limited to, hydroxide sources, such as sodium hydroxide, potassiumhydroxide, sodium carbonate, or potassium carbonate; or an amine such astriethylamine, pyridine, or dimethylaminopyridine, amines are preferred.The progress of the reaction can be followed by using an appropriateanalytical technique, such as thin layer chromatography or highperformance liquid chromatography and when substantially complete, theproduct can be isolated by workup and purified if desired.

Protected alcohols 16, wherein Y comprises one of the followingphosphate ester groups

wherein R⁶ is defined as above, can be prepared by phosphorylation ofmono-protected diols X according to well-known methods (for a generalreviews, see Corbridge Phosphorus: An Outline of its Chemistry,Biochemistry, and Uses, Studies in Inorganic Chemistry, 3rd ed., pp.357-395 (1985); Ramirez et al., 1978, Acc. Chem. Res. 11:239; andKalckare Biological Phosphorylations, Prentice-Hall, New York (1969); J.B. Sweeny in Comprehensive Organic Functional Group Transformations, A.R. Katritzky, O. Meth-Cohn and C. W. Rees, Eds. Pergamon: Oxford, 1995,vol 2, pp. 104-109, the four of which are hereby expressly incorporatedherein by reference). Protected alcohols 16 wherein Y comprises amonophosphate group of the formula:

wherein R⁶ is defined as above, can be prepared by treatment ofmono-protected diol X with phosphorous oxychloride in a suitablesolvent, such as xylene or toluene, at a constant temperature within therange of about 100° C. to about 150° C. for about 2 hours to about 24hours. After the reaction is deemed substantially complete, by using anappropriate analytical method, the reaction mixture is hydrolyzed withR⁶⁻OH. Suitable procedures are referenced in Houben-Weyl, Methoden derOrganische Chemie, Georg Thieme Verlag Stuttgart 1964, vol. XII/2, pp.143-210 and 872-879, hereby expressly incorporated herein by reference.Alternatively, when both R⁶ are hydrogen, can be synthesized by reactingmono-protected diols X with silyl polyphosphate (Okamoto et al., 1985,Bull Chem. Soc. Jpn. 5:3393, hereby expressly incorporated herein byreference) or by hydrogenolysis of their benzyl or phenyl esters (Chenet al., 1998, J. Org. Chem. 6:6511, hereby expressly incorporated hereinby reference). In another alternative procedure, when R⁶ is(C₁-C₆)alkyl, (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, or (C₂-C₆)alkynyl, the monophosphateesters can be prepared by reacting mono-protected diols X withappropriately substituted phophoramidites followed by oxidation of theintermediate with m-chloroperbenzoic acid (Yu et al., 1988, TetrahedronLett. 29:979, hereby expressly incorporated herein by reference) or byreacting mono-protected diols X with dialkyl or diaryl substitutedphosphorochloridates (Pop, et al, 1997, Org. Prep. and Proc. Int.29:341, hereby expressly incorporated herein by reference). Thephosphoramidites are commercially available (e.g., Aldrich Chemical Co.,Milwaukee, Wis.) or readily prepared according to literature procedures(see e.g., Uhlmann et al. 1986, Tetrahedron Lett. 27:1023 and Tanaka etal., 1988, Tetrahedron Lett. 29:199, both of which are hereby expresslyincorporated herein by reference). The phosphorochloridates are alsocommercially available (e.g., Aldrich Chemical Co., Milwaukee, Wis.) orprepared according to literature methods (e.g., Gajda et al, 1995,Synthesis 25:4099. In still another alternative synthesis, protectedalcohols 16, wherein Y comprises a monophosphate group and R⁶ is alkylor aryl, can be prepared by reacting IP⁺(OR⁶)₃ with mono-protected diolsX according to the procedure described in Stowell et al., 1995,Tetrahedron Lett. 36:11, 1825 or by alkylation of protected haloalcohols 14 with the appropriate dialkyl or diaryl phosphates (see e.g.,Okamoto, 1985, Bull Chem. Soc. Jpn. 58:3393, hereby expresslyincorporated herein by reference).

Protected alcohols 16 wherein Y comprises a diphosphate group of theformula

wherein R⁶ is defined as above, can be synthesized by reacting theabove-discussed monophosphates of the formula:

with a phosphate of the formula

(commercially available, e.g., Aldrich Chemical Co., Milwaukee, Wis.),in the presence of carbodiimide such as dicyclohexylcarbodiimide, asdescribed in Houben-Weyl, Methoden der Organische Chemie, Georg ThiemeVerlag Stuttgart 1964, vol. XII/2, pp. 881-885. In the same fashion,protected alcohols 16, wherein Y comprises a triphosphate group of theformula:

can be synthesized by reacting the above-discussed diphosphate protectedalcohols, of the formula:

with a phosphate of the formula:

as described above. Alternatively, when R⁶ is H, protected alcohols 16wherein Y comprises the triphosphate group, can be prepared by reactingmono-protected diols X with salicyl phosphorochloridite and thenpyrophosphate and subsequent cleavage of the adduct thus obtained withiodine in pyridine as described in Ludwig et al., 1989, J. Org. Chem.54:631, hereby expressly incorporated herein by reference.

Protected alcohols 16, wherein Y is —SO₃H or a heterocyclic groupselected from the group consisting of:

can be prepared by halide displacement from protected halo-alcohols 14.Thus, when Y is —SO₃H, protected alcohols 16 can by synthesized byreacting protected halo-alcohols 14 with sodium sulfite as described inGilbert Sulfonation and Related Reactions; Wiley: New York, 1965, pp.136-148 and pp. 161-163; Org. Synth. Coll. Vol. II, Wiley, N.Y., 558,564 (1943); and Org. Synth. Coll. Vol. IV, Wiley, N.Y., 529 (1963), allthree of which are hereby expressly incorporated herein by reference.When Y is one of the above-mentioned heterocycles, protected alcohols 16can be prepared by reacting protected halo-alcohols 14 with thecorresponding heterocycle in the presence of a base. The heterocyclesare available commercially (e.g., Aldrich Chemical Co., Milwaukee, Wis.)or prepared by well-known synthetic methods (see the proceduresdescribed in Ware, 1950, Chem. Rev. 46:403-470, hereby expresslyincorporated herein by reference). Preferably, the reaction is conductedby stirring a mixture comprising 14, the heterocycle, and a solvent at aconstant temperature within the range of about room temperature to about100° C., preferably within the range of about 50° C. to about 70° C. forabout 10 to about 48 hours. Suitable bases include hydroxide bases suchas sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, or potassiumcarbonate. Preferably, the solvent used in forming protected alcohols 16is selected from dimethylformamide; formamide; dimethyl sulfoxide;alcohols, such as methanol or ethanol; and mixtures thereof. Theprogress of the reaction can be followed by using an appropriateanalytical technique, such as thin layer chromatography or highperformance liquid chromatography and when substantially complete, theproduct can be isolated by workup and purified if desired.

Protected alcohols 16, wherein Y is a heteroaryl ring selected from

can be prepared by metallating the suitable heteroaryl ring thenreacting the resulting metallated heteroaryl ring with protectedhalo-alcohols 14 (for a review, see Katritzky Handbook of HeterocyclicChemistry, Pergamon Press: Oxford 1985). The heteroaryl rings areavailable commercially or prepared by well-known synthetic methods (seee.g., Joule et al., Heterocyclic Chemistry, 3rd ed., 1995; De Sarlo etal., 1971, J. Chem. Soc. (C) 86; Oster et al., 1983, J. Org. Chem.48:4307; Iwai et al., 1966, Chem. Pharm. Bull. 14:1277; and U.S. Pat.No. 3,152,148, all of which citations are hereby expressly incorporatedherein by reference). As used herein, the term “metallating” means theforming of a carbon-metal bond, which bond may be substantially ionic incharacter. Metallation can be accomplished by adding about 2 equivalentsof strong organometallic base, preferably with a pK_(a) of about 25 ormore, more preferably with a pK_(a) of greater than about 35, to amixture comprising a suitable organic solvent and the heterocycle. Twoequivalents of base are required: one equivalent of the basedeprotonates the —OH group or the —NH group, and the second equivalentmetallates the heteroaryl ring. Alternatively, the hydroxy group of theheteroaryl ring can be protected with a base-stable, acid-labileprotecting group as described in Greene, T. W., Protective Groups inOrganic Synthesis, 3rd edition 17-237 (1999), hereby expresslyincorporated herein by reference. Where the hydroxy group is protected,only one equivalent of base is required. Examples of suitablebase-stable, acid-labile hydroxyl-protecting groups, include but are notlimited to, ethers, such as methyl, methoxy methyl, methylthiomethyl,methoxyethoxymethyl, bis(2-chloroethoxy)methyl, tetrahydropyranyl,tetrahydrothiopyranyl, tetrahyrofuranyl, tetrahydrothiofuranyl,1-ethoxyethyl, 1-methyl-1-methoxyethyl, t-butyl, allyl, benzyl,o-nitrobenzyl, triphenylmethyl, α-naphthyldiphenylmethyl,p-methoxyphenyldiphenylmethyl, 9-(9-phenyl-10-oxo)anthranyl,trimethylsilyl, isopropyldimethylsilyl, t-butyldimethylsilyl,t-butyldiphenylsilyl, tribenzylsilyl, triisopropylsilyl; and esters,such as pivaloate, adamantoate, and 2,4,6-trimethylbenzoate. Ethers arepreferred, particularly straight chain ethers, such as methyl ether,methoxymethyl ether, methylthiomethyl ether, methoxyethoxymethyl ether,bis(2-chloroethoxy)methyl ether. Preferably, the pK_(a) of the base ishigher than the pK_(a) of the proton of the heterocycle to bedeprotonated. For a listing of pK_(a) s for various heteroaryl rings,see Fraser et al., 1985, Can. J. Chem. 63:3505, hereby expresslyincorporated herein by reference. Suitable bases include, but are notlimited to, alkylmetal bases such as methyllithium, n-butyllithium,tert-butyllithium, sec-butyllithium, phenyllithium, phenyl sodium, andphenyl potassium; metal amide bases such as lithium amide, sodium amide,potassium amide, lithium tetramethylpiperidide, lithiumdiisopropylamide, lithium diethylamide, lithium dicyclohexylamide,sodium hexamethyldisilazide, and lithium hexamethyldisilazide; andhydride bases such as sodium hydride and potassium hydride. If desired,the organometallic base can be activated with a complexing agent, suchas N,N,N′,N′-tetramethylethylenediamine or hexamethylphosphoramide(1970, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 92:4664, hereby expressly incorporated hereinby reference). Solvents suitable for synthesizing protected alcohols 16,wherein Y is a heteroaryl ring include, but are not limited to, diethylether; tetrahydrofuran; and hydrocarbons, such as pentane. Generally,metallation occurs alpha to the heteroatom due to the inductive effectof the heteroatom, however, modification of conditions, such as theidentity of the base and solvents, order of reagent addition, reagentaddition times, and reaction and addition temperatures can be modifiedby one of skill in the art to achieve the desired metallation position(see e.g., Joule et al., Heterocyclic Chemistry, 3rd ed., 1995, pp.30-42, hereby expressly incorporated herein by reference) Alternatively,the position of metallation can be controlled by use of a halogenatedheteroaryl group, wherein the halogen is located on the position of theheteroaryl ring where metallation is desired (see e.g., Joule et al.,Heterocyclic Chemistry, 3rd ed., 1995, p. 33 and Saulnier et al., 1982,J. Org. Chem. 47:757, the two of which citations are hereby expresslyincorporated herein by reference). Halogenated heteroaryl groups areavailable commercially (e.g., Aldrich Chemical Co., Milwaukee, Wis.) orcan be prepared by well-known synthetic methods (see e.g., Joule et al.,Heterocyclic Chemistry, 3rd ed., 1995, pp. 78, 85, 122, 193, 234, 261,280, 308, hereby expressly incorporated herein by reference). Aftermetallation, the reaction mixture comprising the metallated heteroarylring is adjusted to within a temperature range of about 0° C. to aboutroom temperature and protected halo-alcohols 14 (diluted with a solventor in undiluted form) are added, preferably at a rate such that thereaction-mixture temperature remains within about one to two degrees ofthe initial reaction-mixture temperature. After addition of protectedhalo-alcohols 14, the reaction mixture is stirred at a constanttemperature within the range of about room temperature and about thesolvent's boiling temperature and the reaction's progress can bemonitored by the appropriate analytical technique, preferably thin-layerchromatography or high-performance liquid chromatography. After thereaction is substantially complete, protected alcohols 16 can beisolated by workup and purification. It is to be understood thatconditions, such as the identity of protected halo-alcohol 14, the base,solvents, orders of reagent addition, times, and temperatures, can bemodified by one of skill in the art to optimize the yield andselectivity. Exemplary procedures that can be used in such atransformation are described in Shirley et al., 1995, J. Org. Chem.20:225; Chadwick et al., 1979, J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans. I 2845;Rewcastle, 1993, Adv. Het. Chem. 56:208; Katritzky et al., 1993, Adv.Het. Chem. 56:155; and Kessar et al., 1997, Chem. Rev. 297:721. When Yis

protected alcohols 16 can be prepared from their correspondingcarboxylic acid derivatives (16, wherein Y is —CO₂H) as described inBelletire et al, 1988, Synthetic Commun. 18:2063 or from thecorresponding acylchlorides (16, wherein Y is —CO-halo) as described inSkinner et al., 1995, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 77:5440, both citations arehereby expressly incorporated herein by reference. The acylhalides canbe prepared from the carboxylic acids by well known procedures such asthose described in March, J., Advanced Organic Chemistry; ReactionsMechanisms, and Structure, 4th ed., 1992, pp. 437-438, hereby expresslyincorporated herein by reference. When Y is

wherein R⁷ is as defined above, protected alcohols 16 can be prepared byfirst reacting protected halo-alcohols 15 with a trialkyl phosphiteaccording to the procedure described in Kosolapoff, 1951, Org. React.6:273 followed by reacting the derived phosphonic diester with ammoniaaccording to the procedure described in Smith et al., 1957, J. Org.Chem. 22:265, hereby expressly incorporated herein by reference.

When Y is

protected alcohols 16 can be prepared by reacting their sulphonic acidderivatives (i.e., 16, wherein Y is —SO₃H) with ammonia as described inSianesi et al., 1971, Chem. Ber. 104:1880 and Campagna et al., 1994,Farmaco, Ed. Sci. 49:653, both of which citations are hereby expresslyincorporated herein by reference).

As further illustrated in Scheme 2, protected alcohols 16 can bedeprotected providing alcohols 20a. The deprotection method depends onthe identity of the alcohol-protecting group, see e.g., the procedureslisted in Greene, T. W., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 3rdedition 17-237 (1999), particularly see pages 48-49, hereby expresslyincorporated herein by reference. One of skill in the art will readilybe able to choose the appropriate deprotection procedure. When thealcohol is protected as an ether function (e.g., methoxymethyl ether),the alcohol is preferably deprotected with aqueous or alcoholic acid.Suitable deprotection reagents include, but are not limited to, aqueoushydrochloric acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid in methanol,pyridinium-p-toluenesulfonate in ethanol, Amberlyst H-15 in methanol,boric acid in ethylene-glycol-monoethylether, acetic acid in awater-tetrahydrofuran mixture, aqueous hydrochloric acid is preferred.Examples of such procedures are described, respectively, in Bernady etal., 1979, J. Org. Chem. 44:1438; Miyashita et al., 1977, J. Org. Chem.42:3772; Johnston et al., 1988, Synthesis 9; Bongini et al., 1979,Synthesis 618; and Hoyer et al., 1986, Synthesis 655; Gigg et al., 1967,J. Chem. Soc. C, 431; and Corey et al., 1978, J. Am. Chem. Soc.100:1942, all of which are hereby expressly incorporated herein byreference.

Scheme 3 depicts the synthesis of protected lactone alcohols 20 andlactone alcohols 13a. Compounds 20 and 13a correspond to compounds ofthe formula W⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾⁻Zm-OPG and W⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾⁻Z_(m−)OH respectively, whereinW⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾ is a lactone group selected from:

Protected lactone alcohols 20 can be prepared from compounds of theformula 17, 18, or 19 by using well-known condensation reactions andvariations of the Michael reaction. Methods for the synthesis oflactones are disclosed in Multzer in Comprehensive Organic FunctionalGroup Transformations, A. R. Katritzky, O. Meth-Cohn and C. W. Rees,Eds. Pergamon: Oxford, 1995, vol 5, pp. 161-173, hereby expresslyincorporated herein by reference. Mono-protected diols 19, electrophilicprotected alcohols 18, and aldehydes 19 are readily available ethercommercially (e.g., Aldrich Chemical Co., Milwaukee, Wis.) or by wellknown synthetic procedures.

When W⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾ is a beta-lactone group of the formula:

protected lactone alcohols 20 can be prepared from aldehydes 19 andelectrophilic protected alcohols 18, respectively, by aone-pot-addition-lactonization according to the procedure of Masamune etal., 1976, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 98:7874 and Danheiser et al., 1991, J. Org.Chem. 56:1176, both of which are hereby expressly incorporated herein byreference. This one-pot-addition-lactonization methodology has beenreviewed by Multzer in Comprehensive Organic Functional GroupTransformations, A. R. Katritzky, O. Meth-Cohn and C. W. Rees, Eds.Pergamon: Oxford, 1995, vol 5, pp. 161, hereby expressly incorporatedherein by reference When W⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾ is a gamma- or delta-lactone group ofthe formula:

protected lactone alcohols 20 can be prepared from aldehydes 19according to well known synthetic methodology. For example, themethodology described in Masuyama et al., 2000, J. Org. Chem. 65:494;Eisch et al., 1978, J. Organo. Met. Chem. C8 160; Eaton et al., 1947, J.Org. Chem. 37:1947; Yunker et al., 1978, Tetrahedron Lett. 4651; Bhanotet al., 1977, J. Org. Chem. 42:1623; Ehlinger et al., 1980, J. Am. Chem.Soc. 102:5004; and Raunio et al., 1957, J. Org. Chem. 22:570, all ofwhich citations are hereby expressly incorporated herein by reference.For instance, as described in Masuyama et al., 2000, J. Org. Chem.65:494, aldehydes 19 can be treated with about 1 equivalent of a strongorganometallic base, preferably with a pK_(a) of about 25 or more, morepreferably with a pK_(a) of greater than about 35, in a suitable organicsolvent to give a reaction mixture. Suitable bases include, but are notlimited to, alkylmetal bases such as methyllithium, n-butyllithium,tert-butyllithium, sec-butyllithium, phenyllithium, phenyl sodium, andphenyl potassium; metal amide bases such as lithium amide, sodium amide,potassium amide, lithium tetramethylpiperidide, lithiumdiisopropylamide, lithium diethylamide, lithium dicyclohexylamide,sodium hexamethyldisilazide, and lithium hexamethyldisilazide; andhydride bases such as sodium hydride and potassium hydride, preferablylithium tetramethylpiperidide. Suitable solvents include, but are notlimited to, diethyl ether and tetrahydrofuran. The reaction-mixturetemperature is adjusted to within the range of about 0° C. to about 100°C., preferably about room temperature to about 50° C., and a halide ofthe formula:

wherein z is 1 or 2 (diluted with a solvent or in undiluted form) isadded. The reaction mixture is stirred for a period of about 2 hours toabout 48 hours, preferably about 5 to about 10 hours, during which timethe reaction's progress can be followed by using an appropriateanalytical technique, such as thin layer chromatography or highperformance liquid chromatography. When the reaction is deemedsubstantially complete, protected lactone alcohols 20 can be isolated byworkup and purified if desired. When W⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾ is a gamma- ordelta-lactone group of the formula:

protected lactone alcohols 20 can be synthesized by deprotonating thecorresponding lactone with a strong base providing the lactone enolateand reacting the enolate with electrophilic protected alcohols 20 (for adetailed discussion of enolate formation of active methylene compoundssuch as lactones, see House Modern Synthetic Reactions; W. A. Benjamin,Inc. Philippines 1972 pp. 492-570, and for a discussion of reaction oflactone enolates with electrophiles such as carbonyl compounds, seeMarch, J. Advanced Organic Chemistry; Reactions Mechanisms, andStructure, 4th ed., 1992, pp. 944-945, both of which are herebyexpressly incorporated herein by reference). Lactone-enolate formationcan be accomplished by adding about 1 equivalent of a strongorganometallic base, preferably with a pK_(a) of about 25 or more, morepreferably with a pK_(a) of greater than about 35, to a mixturecomprising a suitable organic solvent and the lactone. Suitable basesinclude, but are not limited to, alkylmetal bases such as methyllithium,n-butyllithium, tert-butyllithium, sec-butyllithium, phenyllithium,phenyl sodium, and phenyl potassium; metal amide bases such as lithiumamide, sodium amide, potassium amide, lithium tetramethylpiperidide,lithium diisopropylamide, lithium diethylamide, lithiumdicyclohexylamide, sodium hexamethyldisilazide, and lithiumhexamethyldisilazide; and hydride bases such as sodium hydride andpotassium hydride, preferably lithium tetramethylpiperidide. Solventssuitable for lactone-enolate formation include, but are not limited to,diethyl ether and tetrahydrofuran. After enolate formation, thereaction-mixture temperature is adjusted to within the range of about−78° C. to about room temperature, preferably about −50° C. to about 0°C., and electrophilic protected alcohols 18 (diluted with a solvent orin undiluted form) are added, preferably at a rate such that thereaction-mixture temperature remains within about one to two degrees ofthe initial reaction-mixture temperature. The reaction mixture isstirred for a period of about 15 minutes to about 5 hours, during whichtime the reaction's progress can be followed by using an appropriateanalytical technique, such as thin layer chromatography or highperformance liquid chromatography. When the reaction is deemedsubstantially complete, protected lactone alcohols 20 can be isolated byworkup and purified if desired. When W⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾ is a lactone group of theformula:

protected lactone alcohols 20 can be prepared from aldehydes 19according to the procedure described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,622,338, herebyexpressly incorporated herein by reference.

When W⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾ is a gamma- or delta-lactone group of the formula:

protected lactone alcohols 20 can be prepared according to a three stepsequence. The first step comprises base-mediated reaction ofelectrophilic protected alcohols 18 with succinic acid esters (i.e.,R⁹O₂CCH₂CH₂CO₂R⁹, wherein R⁹ is alkyl) or glutaric acid esters (i.e.,R⁹O₂CCH₂CH₂CH₂CO₂R⁹, wherein R⁹ is alkyl) providing a diesterintermediate of the formula 21:

wherein x is 1 or 2 depending on whether the gamma or delta lactonegroup is desired. The reaction can be performed by adding about 1equivalent of a strong organometallic base, preferably with a pK_(a) ofabout 25 or more, more preferably with a pK_(a) of greater than about35, to a mixture comprising a suitable organic solvent and the succinicor glutaric acid ester. Suitable bases include, but are not limited to,alkylmetal bases such as methyllithium, n-butyllithium,tert-butyllithium, sec-butyllithium, phenyllithium, phenyl sodium, andphenyl potassium; metal amide bases such as lithium amide, sodium amide,potassium amide, lithium tetramethylpiperidide, lithiumdiisopropylamide, lithium diethylamide, lithium dicyclohexylamide,sodium hexamethyldisilazide, and lithium hexamethyldisilazide; andhydride bases such as sodium hydride and potassium hydride, preferablylithium tetramethylpiperidide. Suitable solvents include, but are notlimited to, diethyl ether and tetrahydrofuran. After enolate formation,the reaction-mixture temperature is adjusted to within the range ofabout −78° C. to about room temperature, preferably about −50° C. toabout 0° C., and electrophilic protected alcohols 18 (diluted with asolvent or in undiluted form) are added, preferably at a rate such thatthe reaction-mixture temperature remains within about one to two degreesof the initial reaction-mixture temperature. The reaction mixture isstirred for a period of about 15 minutes to about 5 hours, during whichtime the reaction's progress can be followed by using an appropriateanalytical technique, such as thin layer chromatography or highperformance liquid chromatography. When the reaction is deemedsubstantially complete, the diester intermediate be isolated by workupand purified if desired. In the second step, the intermediate diestercan be reduced, with a hydride reducing agent, to yield a diol of theformula 22:

The reduction can be performed according to the procedures referenced inMarch, J. Advanced Organic Chemistry; Reactions Mechanisms, andStructure, 4th ed., 1992, p. 1214, hereby expressly incorporated hereinby reference). Suitable reducing agents include, but are not limited to,lithium aluminum hydride, diisobutylaluminum hydride, sodiumborohydride, and lithium borohydride). In the third step, the diol canbe oxidatively cyclized with RuH₂(PPh₃)₄ to the product protectedlactone alcohols 20 according to the procedure of Yoshikawa et al.,1986, J. Org. Chem. 51:2034 and Yoshikawa et al., 1983, TetrahedronLett. 26:2677, both of which citations are hereby expressly incorporatedherein by reference. When W⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾ is a lactone group of the formula:

protected lactone alcohols 20 can be synthesized by reacting theGrignard salts of electrophilic protected alcohols 18, where E is ahalide, with 5,6-dihydro-2H-pyran-2-one, commercially available (e.g.,Aldrich Chemical Co., Milwaukee, Wis.), in the presence of catalyticamounts of a1-dimethylaminoacetyl)pyrolidine-2yl)methyl-diarylphosphine-copper (I)iodide complex as described in Tomioka et al., 1995, Tetrahedron Lett.36:4275, hereby expressly incorporated herein by reference.

Scheme 4 outlines methodology for the synthesis of protected alcohols14. Compounds 14, wherein n is an integer ranging from 1 to 5, can beprepared from compounds 11 using general synthetic strategy depicted andadapting the synthetic protocols from those discussed for Scheme 1.

Next, Scheme 4 depicts the general strategy for the synthesis ofcompounds 14 wherein n is 0. First, Esters 27, wherein R⁸ is as definedabove, are synthesized by oxidation of mono-protected diols X in thepresence of R⁸OH (see generally, March, J. Advanced Organic Chemistry;Reactions Mechanisms, and Structure, 4th ed., 1992, p. 1196). Anexemplary procedure for such an oxidation is described in Stevens etal., 1982, Tetrahedron Lett. 23:4647 (HOCl); Sundararaman et al., 1978,Tetrahedron Lett. 1627 (O₃/KOH); Wilson et al., 1982, J. Org. Chem.47:1360 (t-BuOOH/Et₃N); and Williams et al., 1988, Tetrahedron Lett.29:5087 (Br₂), the four of which citations are hereby expresslyincorporated herein by reference. Compounds 28 are converted tocompounds 14 wherein n is 0 by adapting the synthetic proceduresdepicted in Scheme 1.

Scheme 5 outlines methodology for the synthesis of protected alcohols 29and alcohols 15a, which correspond to W⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾⁻Z_(m−)OPG andW⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾Z_(m−)OH, respectively, wherein W⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾ isC(R¹)(R²)—(CH₂)_(c)C(R³)(R⁴)—Y. The synthesis of starting materials 14,26, and 28 are depicted in Scheme 4 and the synthetic methods andprocedures can be adapted from those described for Scheme 2.

Scheme 6 depicts the synthesis of protected lactone alcohols 30 andlactone alcohols 16a. Compounds 30 and 16a correspond to compounds ofthe formula, which correspond to compounds W⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾⁻Z_(m−)OH, whereinW⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾ is C(R¹)(R²)(CH₂)_(c−)V and V is a Group selected from:

As shown in Scheme 6, protected lactone alcohols 30 and lactone alcohols16a can be synthesized from compounds of the formula X, 11, or 12 byadaptation of the methods and procedures discussed above for Scheme 3.

Scheme 7 depicts the synthesis of halides 18e. Halides 18 can besynthesized by a variety of methods. One method involves conversion ofthe alcohol to a leaving group such as a sulfonic ester, such as, forexample, tosylate, brosylate, mesylate, or nosylate. This intermediateis then treated with a source of X⁻, wherein X⁻ is I⁻, Br⁻, or Cl⁻ in asolvent such as THF or ether. A general method for converting vinyl andphenyl alcohols to thiols involves initially converting the alcohol to aleaving group (e.g., a tosylate) then treating with a halidenucleophile.

Scheme 8 outlines the synthesis of compounds I. In the first step,compounds I are synthesized by reacting compounds 17 (compounds X 11,12, 13, 14, 15, and 16 are encompassed by 17) with compounds 31 underthe conditions suitable for the formation of compounds I′. Theconditions and methods discussed in Scheme 1 above for the synthesis ofmono-protected diols X from alcohols 6 can be adapted for the synthesisof compounds 17. Compounds 31, wherein Y is a suitable leaving group asdefined above, preferably an anhydride, an ester, or an amide group, arereadily obtained commercially (e.g., Aldrich Chemical Co. MilwaukeeWis.) or by well known synthetic methods. Compounds I′ are obtained byreacting compounds 31 with compounds 17 under the conditions suitablefor alkyl-de-acyloxy substitution. (For a review, See Kharasch;Reinmuth, Grignard Reactions of Nonmetallic Substances; Prentice Hall:Englewood Cliffs, N.J., 1954, pp. 561-562 and 846-908). In a preferredprocedure, the conversion of anhydrides, carboxylic esters, or amides toketones can be accomplished with organometallic compounds. In aparticular procedure, anhydrides and carboxylic esters give ketones whentreated using inverse addition of Grignard reagents at low temperaturewith a solvent in the presence of HMPA. See Newman, J. Org. Chem. 1948,13, 592; Huet; Empotz; Jubier Tetrahedron 1973, 29, 479; and Larock,Comprehensive Organic Transformations; VCH: New York, 1989, pp. 685-686,693-700. Ketones can also be prepare by the treatment of thioamides withorganolithium compounds (alkyl or aryl). See Tominaga; Kohra; HosomiTetrahedron Lett. 1987, 28, 1529. Moreover, alkyllithium compounds havebeen used to give ketones from carboxylic esters. See Petrov; Kaplan;Tsir J. Gen. Chem. USSR 1962, 32, 691. The reaction must be carried outin a high-boiling solvent such as toluene. Di-substituted amides alsocan be used to synthesize ketones. See Evans J. Chem. Soc. 1956, 4691;and Wakefield Organolithium Methods; Academic Press: New York, 1988, pp.82-88. Finally, compounds I′ are reduced using methods known to those ofordinary skill in the art to afford diol I. See Comprehensive OrganicTransformations; VCH: New York, 1989. It is readily recognized that thediol compound I are stereoisomeric and can therefore exist asenantiomers and diastereomers. Separation of the stereoisomers (i.e.,enantiomers or diastereomers) can be achieved by methods known in theart, for example, conversion to a chiral salt and crystallization,chiral chromatography, or chiral HPLC.

Scheme 9 illustrates the alpha disubstitution of an ester containing aterminal protected hydroxyl moiety. Compounds that contain strongelectron withdrawing groups are easily converted to the correspondingenolates. These enolate ions can readily attack an electrophileresulting in alpha substitution. For a review see Some Modern Methods ofOrganic Synthesis, 3^(rd) Ed.; Cambridge University Press: Cambridge,1986, pp. 1-26, incorporated herein by reference. Typical procedures aredescribed in Juaristi et al., J. Org. Chem., 56, 1623 (1991) and Juliaet al., Tetrahedron, 41, 3717 (1985). The reaction is successful forprimary and secondary alkyl, allylic, and benzylic. The use of polaraprotic solvents, e.g., dimethylformamide or dimethylsulfoxide, arepreferred. Phase transfer catalysts can also be used. See Tundo et al.J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans. 1, 1987, 2159, which is hereby expresslyincorporated herein by reference.

The conversion to a carboxylic acid with an additional carbon isachieved by treating an acyl halide with diazomethane to generate anintermediate diazo ketone, which in the presence of water and silveroxide rearranges through a ketene intermediate to a carboxylic acid withan additional carbon aton 37. If the reaction is done in an alcoholinstead of water an ester is recovered. See Vogel's Textbook ofPractical Chemistry, Longman: London, 1978, pp. 483; Meier et al. Angew.Chem. Int. Ed. Eng. 1975, 14, 32-43, which are incorporated herein byreference. Alternatively, the carboxylic acid can be esterified by knowntechniques. The reaction can be repeated to generate methylene groupsadjacent to the carboxylic acid.

Scheme 10 outlines methodology for the synthesis of protected alcohols42a wherein Y, R¹, R², Z, and m are defined as above. Protected alcohols42a correspond to compounds of the formula W⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾⁻Zm-OPG, whereinW⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾ is C(R¹)(R²)—Y.

Protected alcohols 42, wherein Y comprises a —C(O)OH group, can besynthesized by oxidizing mono-protected diols 39 with an agent suitablefor oxidizing a primary alcohol to a carboxylic acid. (M. Hudlicky,Oxidations in Organic Chemistry, ACS Monograph 186, 1990, pp. 127-130,incorporated herein by reference). Suitable oxidizing agents include,but are not limited to, pyridinium dichromate (Corey et al., 1979,Tetrahedron Lett. 399); manganese dioxide (Ahrens et al., 1967, J.Heterocycl. Chem. 4:625); sodium permanganate monohydrate (Menger etal., 1981, Tetrahedron Lett. 22:1655); and potassium permanganate (Samet al., 1972, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 94:4024), all of which citations arehereby expressly incorporated herein by reference. The preferredoxidizing reagent is pyridinium dichromate. In an alternative syntheticprocedure, protected alcohols 42, wherein Y comprises a —C(O)OH group,can be synthesized by treatment of protected halo-alcohols 40, wherein Xis iodo, with CO or CO₂, as described in Bailey et al., 1990, J. Org.Chem. 55:5404 and Yanagisawa et al., 1994, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 116:6130,the two of which citations are hereby expressly incorporated herein byreference. Protected alcohols 42, wherein Y comprises —C(O)OR⁵, whereinR⁵ is as defined above, can be synthesized by oxidation ofmono-protected diols 39 in the presence of R⁵OH (see generally, March,J. Advanced Organic Chemistry; Reactions Mechanisms, and Structure, 4thed., 1992, p. 1196). An exemplary procedure for such an oxidation isdescribed in Stevens et al., 1982, Tetrahedron Lett. 23:4647 (HOCl);Sundararaman et al., 1978, Tetrahedron Lett. 1627 (O₃/KOH); Wilson etal., 1982, J. Org. Chem. 47:1360 (t-BuOOH/Et₃N); and Williams et al.,1988, Tetrahedron Lett. 29:5087 (Br₂), the four of which citations areincorporated herein by reference. Preferably, protected alcohols 42,wherein Y comprises a —C(O)OR⁵ group are synthesized from thecorresponding carboxylic acid (i.e., 42, wherein Y comprises —C(O)OH) byesterification with R⁵OH (e.g., see March, J., Advanced OrganicChemistry; Reactions Mechanisms, and Structure, 4th ed., Wiley, NewYork, 1992, p. 393-394, incorporated herein by reference). In anotheralternative synthesis, protected alcohols 42, wherein Y comprises—C(O)OR⁵, can be prepared from protected halo-alcohols 40 bycarbonylation with transition metal complexes (see e.g., March, J.Advanced Organic Chemistry; Reactions Mechanisms, and Structure, 4thed., Wiley, New York, 1992, p. 484-486; Urata et al., 1991, TetrahedronLett. 32:36, 4733); and Ogata et al., 1969, J. Org. Chem. 3985, thethree of which citations are hereby expressly incorporated herein byreference). Protected alcohols 42, wherein Y comprises —OC(O)R⁵, whereinR⁵ is as defined above, can be prepared by acylation of mono-protecteddiols 39 with a carboxylate equivalent such as an acyl halide (i.e.,R⁵C(O)-Hal, wherein Hal is iodo, bromo, or chloro, see e.g., March, J.Advanced Organic Chemistry; Reactions Mechanisms, and Structure, 4thed., Wiley, New York, 1992, p. 392 and Org. Synth. Coll. Vol. III,Wiley, N.Y., pp. 142, 144, 167, and 187 (1955)) or an anhydride (i.e.,R⁵C(O)—O—(O)CR⁵, see e.g., March, J. Advanced Organic Chemistry;Reactions Mechanisms, and Structure, 4th ed., 1992, p. 392-393 and Org.Synth. Coll. Vol. III, Wiley, N.Y., pp. 11, 127, 141, 169, 237, 281,428, 432, 690, and 833 (1955), all of which citations are incorporatedherein by reference). Preferably, the reaction is conducted by adding abase to a solution comprising mono-protected diols 39, a carboxylateequivalent, and an organic solvent, which solution is preferablymaintained at a constant temperature within the range of 0° C. to aboutroom temperature. Solvents suitable for reacting mono-protected diols 39with a carboxylate equivalent include, but are not limited to,dichloromethane, toluene, and ether, preferably dichloromethane.Suitable bases include, but are not limited to, hydroxide sources, suchas sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, or potassiumcarbonate; or an amine such as triethylamine, pyridine, ordimethylaminopyridine. The progress of the reaction can be followed byusing an appropriate analytical technique, such as thin layerchromatography or high performance liquid chromatography and whensubstantially complete, the product can be isolated by workup andpurified if desired.

Protected alcohols 42, wherein Y comprises one of the followingphosphate ester groups

wherein R⁶ is defined as above, can be prepared by phosphorylation ofmono-protected diols X according to well-known methods (for generalreviews, see Corbridge Phosphorus: An Outline of its Chemistry.Biochemistry, and Uses, Studies in Inorganic Chemistry, 3rd ed., pp.357-395 (1985); Ramirez et al., 1978, Acc. Chem. Res. 11:239; andKalckare Biological Phosphorylations, Prentice-Hall, New York (1969); J.B. Sweeny in Comprehensive Organic Functional Group Transformations, A.R. Katritzky, O. Meth-Cohn and C. W. Rees, Eds. Pergamon: Oxford, 1995,vol 2, pp. 104-109, the four of which are hereby expressly incorporatedherein by reference). Protected alcohols 42 wherein Y comprises amonophosphate group of the formula:

wherein R⁶ is defined as above, can be prepared by treatment ofmono-protected diol 39 with phosphorous oxychloride in a suitablesolvent, such as xylene or toluene, at a constant temperature within therange of about 100° C. to about 150° C. for about 2 hours to about 24hours. After the reaction is deemed substantially complete, by using anappropriate analytical method, the reaction mixture is hydrolyzed withR⁶⁻OH. Suitable procedures are referenced in Houben-Weyl, Methoden derOrganische Chemie, Georg Thieme Verlag Stuttgart: 1964, vol. XII/2, pp.143-210 and 872-879, incorporated herein by reference. Alternatively,when both R⁶ are hydrogen, can be synthesized by reacting mono-protecteddiols X with silyl polyphosphate (Okamoto et al., 1985, Bull Chem. Soc.Jpn. 58:3393, hereby expressly incorporated herein by reference) or byhydrogenolysis of their benzyl or phenyl esters (Chen et al., 1998, J.Org. Chem. 63:6511, incorporated herein by reference). In anotheralternative procedure, when R⁶ is (C₁-C₆)alkyl, (C₂-C₆)alkenyl, or(C₂-C₆)alkynyl, the monophosphate esters can be prepared by reactingmono-protected diols 39 with appropriately substituted phophoramiditesfollowed by oxidation of the intermediate with m-chloroperbenzoic acid(Yu et al., 1988, Tetrahedron Lett. 29:979, incorporated herein byreference) or by reacting mono-protected diols 39 with dialkyl or diarylsubstituted phosphorochloridates (Pop, et al, 1997, Org. Prep. and Proc.Int. 29:341, incorporated herein by reference). The phosphoramidites arecommercially available (e.g., Aldrich Chemical Co., Milwaukee, Wis.) orreadily prepared according to literature procedures (see e.g., Uhlmannet al. 1986, Tetrahedron Lett. 21:1023 and Tanaka et al., 1988,Tetrahedron Lett. 29:199, both of which are incorporated herein byreference). The phosphorochloridates are also commercially available(e.g., Aldrich Chemical Co., Milwaukee, Wis.) or prepared according toliterature methods (e.g., Gajda et al. 1995, Synthesis 25:4099. In stillanother alternative synthesis, protected alcohols 42, wherein Ycomprises a monophosphate group and R⁶ is alkyl or aryl, can be preparedby reacting IP⁺(OR⁶)₃ with mono-protected diols 39 according to theprocedure described in Stowell et al., 1995, Tetrahedron Lett. 36:11,1825 or by alkylation of protected halo alcohols 40 with the appropriatedialkyl or diaryl phosphates (see e.g., Okamoto, 1985, Bull Chem. Soc.Jpn. 58:3393, incorporated herein by reference).

Protected alcohols 42 wherein Y comprises a diphosphate group of theformula

wherein R⁶ is defined as above, can be synthesized by reacting theabove-discussed monophosphates of the formula:

with a phosphate of the formula

(commercially available, e.g., Aldrich Chemical Co., Milwaukee, Wis.),in the presence of carbodiimide such as dicyclohexylcarbodiimide, asdescribed in Houben-Weyl, Methoden der Organische Chemie, Georg ThiemeVerlag Stuttgart 1964, vol. XII/2, pp. 881-885. In the same fashion,protected alcohols 42, wherein Y comprises a triphosphate group of theformula:

can be synthesized by reacting the above-discussed diphosphate-protectedalcohols, of the formula:

with a phosphate of the formula:

as described above. Alternatively, when R⁶ is H, protected alcohols 42wherein Y comprises the triphosphate group, can be prepared by reactingmono-protected diols 39 with salicyl phosphorochloridite and thenpyrophosphate and subsequent cleavage of the adduct thus obtained withiodine in pyridine as described in Ludwig et al., 1989, J. Org. Chem.54:631, incorporated herein by reference.

Protected alcohols 42, wherein Y is —SO₃H or a heterocyclic groupselected from the group consisting of:

can be prepared by halide displacement from protected halo-alcohols 40.Thus, when Y is —SO₃H, protected alcohols 42 can by synthesized byreacting protected halo-alcohols 40 with sodium sulfite as described inGilbert Sulfonation and Related Reactions; Wiley: New York, 1965, pp.136-148 and pp. 161-163; Org. Synth. Coll. Vol. II, Wiley, N.Y., 558,564 (1943); and Org. Synth. Coll. Vol. IV, Wiley, N.Y., 529 (1963), allthree of which are incorporated herein by reference. When Y is one ofthe above-mentioned heterocycles, protected alcohols 42 can be preparedby reacting protected halo-alcohols 40 with the correspondingheterocycle in the presence of a base. The heterocycles are availablecommercially (e.g., Aldrich Chemical Co., Milwaukee, Wis.) or preparedby well-known synthetic methods (see the procedures described in Ware,1950, Chem. Rev. 46:403-470, incorporated herein by reference).Preferably, the reaction is conducted by stirring a mixture comprising40, the heterocycle, and a solvent at a constant temperature within therange of about room temperature to about 100° C., preferably within therange of about 50° C. to about 70° C. for about 10 to about 48 hours.Suitable bases include hydroxide bases such as sodium hydroxide,potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, or potassium carbonate.Preferably, the solvent used in forming protected alcohols 42 isselected from dimethylformamide; formamide; dimethyl sulfoxide;alcohols, such as methanol or ethanol; and mixtures thereof. Theprogress of the reaction can be followed by using an appropriateanalytical technique, such as thin layer chromatography or highperformance liquid chromatography and when substantially complete, theproduct can be isolated by workup and purified if desired.

Protected alcohols 42, wherein Y is a heteroaryl ring selected from

can be prepared by metallating the suitable heteroaryl ring thenreacting the resulting metallated heteroaryl ring with protectedhalo-alcohols 40 (for a review, see Katritzky Handbook of HeterocyclicChemistry, Pergamon Press: Oxford 1985). The heteroaryl rings areavailable commercially or prepared by well-known synthetic methods (seee.g., Joule et al., Heterocyclic Chemistry, 3rd ed., 1995; De Sarlo etal., 1971, J. Chem. Soc. (C) 86; Oster et al., 1983, J. Org. Chem.48:4307; Iwai et al., 1966, Chem. Pharm. Bull. 14:1277; and U.S. Pat.No. 3,152,148, all of which citations are incorporated herein byreference). As used herein, the term “metallating” means the forming ofa carbon-metal bond, which bond may be substantially ionic in character.Metallation can be accomplished by adding about 2 equivalents of strongorganometallic base, preferably with a pK_(a) of about 25 or more, morepreferably with a pK_(a) of greater than about 35, to a mixturecomprising a suitable organic solvent and the heterocycle. Twoequivalents of base are required: one equivalent of the basedeprotonates the —OH group or the —NH group, and the second equivalentmetallates the heteroaryl ring. Alternatively, the hydroxy group of theheteroaryl ring can be protected with a base-stable, acid-labileprotecting group as described in Greene, T. W., Protective Groups inOrganic Synthesis, 3rd edition 17-237 (1999), hereby expresslyincorporated herein by reference. Where the hydroxy group is protected,only one equivalent of base is required. Examples of suitablebase-stable, acid-labile hydroxyl-protecting groups, include but are notlimited to, ethers, such as methyl, methoxy methyl, methylthiomethyl,methoxyethoxymethyl, bis(2-chloroethoxy)methyl, tetrahydropyranyl,tetrahydrothiopyranyl, tetrahyrofuranyl, tetrahydrothiofuranyl,1-ethoxyethyl, 1-methyl-1-methoxyethyl, t-butyl, allyl, benzyl,o-nitrobenzyl, triphenylmethyl, α-naphthyldiphenylmethyl,p-methoxyphenyldiphenylmethyl, 9-(9-phenyl-10-oxo)anthranyl,trimethylsilyl, isopropyldimethylsilyl, t-butyldimethylsilyl,t-butyldiphenylsilyl, tribenzylsilyl, triisopropylsilyl; and esters,such as pivaloate, adamantoate, and 2,4,6-trimethylbenzoate. Ethers arepreferred, particularly straight chain ethers, such as methyl ether,methoxymethyl ether, methylthiomethyl ether, methoxyethoxymethyl ether,bis(2-chloroethoxy)methyl ether. Preferably, the pK_(a) of the base ishigher than the pK_(a) of the proton of the heterocycle to bedeprotonated. For a listing of pK_(a)s for various heteroaryl rings, seeFraser et al., 1985, Can. J. Chem. 63:3505, incorporated herein byreference. Suitable bases include, but are not limited to, alkylmetalbases such as methyllithium, n-butyllithium, tert-butyllithium,sec-butyllithium, phenyllithium, phenyl sodium, and phenyl potassium;metal amide bases such as lithium amide, sodium amide, potassium amide,lithium tetramethylpiperidide, lithium diisopropylamide, lithiumdiethylamide, lithium dicyclohexylamide, sodium hexamethyldisilazide,and lithium hexamethyldisilazide; and hydride bases such as sodiumhydride and potassium hydride. If desired, the organometallic base canbe activated with a complexing agent, such asN,N,N′,N′-tetramethylethylenediamine or hexamethylphosphoramide (1970,J. Am. Chem. Soc. 92:4664, hereby expressly incorporated herein byreference). Solvents suitable for synthesizing protected alcohols 42,wherein Y is a heteroaryl ring include, but are not limited to, diethylether; tetrahydrofuran; and hydrocarbons, such as pentane. Generally,metallation occurs alpha to the heteroatom due to the inductive effectof the heteroatom, however, modification of conditions, such as theidentity of the base and solvents, order of reagent addition, reagentaddition times, and reaction and addition temperatures can be modifiedby one of skill in the art to achieve the desired metallation position(see e.g., Joule et al., Heterocyclic Chemistry, 3rd ed., 1995, pp.30-42, hereby expressly incorporated herein by reference) Alternatively,the position of metallation can be controlled by use of a halogenatedheteroaryl group, wherein the halogen is located on the position of theheteroaryl ring where metallation is desired (see e.g., Joule et al.,Heterocyclic Chemistry, 3rd ed., 1995, p. 33 and Saulnier et al., 1982,J. Org. Chem. 47:757, the two of which citations are hereby expresslyincorporated herein by reference). Halogenated heteroaryl groups areavailable commercially (e.g., Aldrich Chemical Co., Milwaukee, Wis.) orcan be prepared by well-known synthetic methods (see e.g., Joule et al.,Heterocyclic Chemistry, 3rd ed., 1995, pp. 78, 85, 122, 193, 234, 261,280, 308, hereby expressly incorporated herein by reference). Aftermetallation, the reaction mixture comprising the metallated heteroarylring is adjusted to within a temperature range of about 0° C. to aboutroom temperature and protected halo-alcohols 40 (diluted with a solventor in undiluted form) are added, preferably at a rate such that thereaction-mixture temperature remains within about one to two degrees ofthe initial reaction-mixture temperature. After addition of protectedhalo-alcohols 40, the reaction mixture is stirred at a constanttemperature within the range of about room temperature and about thesolvent's boiling temperature and the reaction's progress can bemonitored by the appropriate analytical technique, preferably thin-layerchromatography or high-performance liquid chromatography. After thereaction is substantially complete, protected alcohols 42 can beisolated by workup and purification. It is to be understood thatconditions, such as the identity of protected halo-alcohol 40, the base,solvents, orders of reagent addition, times, and temperatures, can bemodified by one of skill in the art to optimize the yield andselectivity. Exemplary procedures that can be used in such atransformation are described in Shirley et al., 1995, J. Org. Chem.20:225; Chadwick et al., 1979, J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans. I 2845;Rewcastle, 1993, Adv. Hetr. Chem. 56:208; Katritzky et al., 1993, Adv.Het. Chem. 56:155; and Kessar et al., 1997, Chem. Rev. 97:721.

When Y is

protected alcohols 42 can be prepared from their correspondingcarboxylic acid derivatives (42, wherein Y is —CO₂H) as described inBelletire et al, 1988, Synthetic Commun. 18:2063 or from thecorresponding acylchlorides (42, wherein Y is —CO-halo) as described inSkinner et al., 1995, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 77:5440, both citations areincorporated herein by reference. The acylhalides can be prepared fromthe carboxylic acids by well known procedures such as those described inMarch, J., Advanced Organic Chemistry; Reactions Mechanisms, andStructure, 4th ed., 1992, pp. 437-438, hereby expressly incorporatedherein by reference. When Y is

wherein R⁷ is as defined above, protected alcohols 42 can be prepared byfirst reacting protected halo-alcohols 40 with a trialkyl phosphiteaccording to the procedure described in Kosolapoff, 1951, Org. React.6:273 followed by reacting the derived phosphonic diester with ammoniaaccording to the procedure described in Smith et al., 1957, J. Org.Chem. 22:265, incorporated herein by reference. When Y is

protected alcohols 42 can be prepared by reacting their sulphonic acidderivatives (i.e., 42, wherein Y is —SO₃H) with ammonia as described inSianesi et al., 1971, Chem. Ber. 104:1880 and Campagna et al., 1994,Farmaco, Ed. Sci. 42:653, both of which citations are incorporatedherein by reference).

As further illustrated in Scheme 10, protected alcohols 42 can bedeprotected providing alcohols 42a. The deprotection method depends onthe identity of the alcohol-protecting group, see e.g., the procedureslisted in Greene, T. W., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 3rdedition 17-237 (1999), particularly see pages 48-49, incorporated hereinby reference. One of skill in the art will readily be able to choose theappropriate deprotection procedure. When the alcohol is protected as anether function (e.g., methoxymethyl ether), the alcohol is preferablydeprotected with aqueous or alcoholic acid. Suitable deprotectionreagents include, but are not limited to, aqueous hydrochloric acid,p-toluenesulfonic acid in methanol, pyridinium-p-toluenesulfonate inethanol, Amberlyst H-15 in methanol, boric acid inethylene-glycol-monoethylether, acetic acid in a water-tetrahydrofuranmixture, aqueous hydrochloric acid is preferred. Examples of suchprocedures are described, respectively, in Bernady et al., 1979, J. Org.Chem. 44:1438; Miyashita et al., 1977, J. Org. Chem. 42:3772; Johnstonet al., 1988, Synthesis 393; Bongini et al., 1979, Synthesis 618; andHoyer et al., 1986, Synthesis 655; Gigg et al., 1967, J. Chem. Soc. C,431; and Corey et al., 1978, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 100:1942, all of whichare incorporated herein by reference.

Scheme 11 depicts the synthesis of protected lactone alcohols 46 andlactone. Compound 46 corresponds to compounds of the formulaW⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾⁻Zm-OPG and, wherein W⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾ is a lactone group selected from:

Protected lactone alcohols 46 can be prepared from compounds of theformula 43, 44, or 45 by using well-known condensation reactions andvariations of the Michael reaction. Methods for the synthesis oflactones are disclosed in Multzer in Comprehensive Organic FunctionalGroup Transformations, A. R. Katritzky, O. Meth-Cohn and C. W. Rees,Eds. Pergamon: Oxford, 1995, vol 5, pp. 161-173, incorporated herein byreference. Mono-protected diols 43, electrophilic protected alcohols 44,and aldehydes 45 are readily available either commercially (e.g.,Aldrich Chemical Co., Milwaukee, Wis.) or can be prepared by well knownsynthetic procedures.

When W⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾ is a beta-lactone group of the formula:

protected lactone alcohols 46 can be prepared from aldehydes 45 andelectrophilic protected alcohols 44, respectively, by aone-pot-addition-lactonization according to the procedure of Masamune etal., 1976, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 98:7874 and Danheiser et al., 1991, J. Org.Chem. 56:1176, both of which are incorporated herein by reference. Thisone-pot-addition-lactonization methodology has been reviewed by Multzerin Comprehensive Organic Functional Group Transformations, A. R.Katritzky, O. Meth-Cohn and C. W. Rees, Eds. Pergamon: Oxford, 1995, vol5, pp. 161, incorporated herein by reference When W⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾ is a gamma- ordelta-lactone group of the formula:

protected lactone alcohols 46 can be prepared from aldehydes 45according to well known synthetic methodology. For example, themethodology described in Masuyama et al., 2000, J. Org. Chem. 65:494;Eisch et al., 1978, J. Organomet. Chem. C8 160; Eaton et al., 1947, J.Org. Chem. 37:1947; Yunker et al., 1978, Tetrahedron Lett. 4651; Bhanotet al., 1977, J. Org. Chem. 42:1623; Ehlinger et al., 1980, J. Am. Chem.Soc. 102:5004; and Raunio et al., 1957, J. Org. Chem. 22:570, all ofwhich citations are incorporated herein by reference. For instance, asdescribed in Masuyama et al., 2000, J. Org. Chem. 65:494, aldehydes 45can be treated with about 1 equivalent of a strong organometallic base,preferably with a pK_(a) of about 25 or more, more preferably with apK_(a) of greater than about 35, in a suitable organic solvent to give areaction mixture. Suitable bases include, but are not limited to,alkylmetal bases such as methyllithium, n-butyllithium,tert-butyllithium, sec-butyllithium, phenyllithium, phenyl sodium, andphenyl potassium; metal amide bases such as lithium amide, sodium amide,potassium amide, lithium tetramethylpiperidide, lithiumdiisopropylamide, lithium diethylamide, lithium dicyclohexylamide,sodium hexamethyldisilazide, and lithium hexamethyldisilazide; andhydride bases such as sodium hydride and potassium hydride, preferablylithium tetramethylpiperidide. Suitable solvents include, but are notlimited to, diethyl ether and tetrahydrofuran. The reaction-mixturetemperature is adjusted to within the range of about 0° C. to about 100°C., preferably about room temperature to about 50° C., and a halide ofthe formula:

wherein z is 1 or 2 (diluted with a solvent or in undiluted form) isadded. The reaction mixture is stirred for a period of about 2 hours toabout 48 hours, preferably about 5 to about 10 hours, during which timethe reaction's progress can be followed by using an appropriateanalytical technique, such as thin layer chromatography or highperformance liquid chromatography. When the reaction is deemedsubstantially complete, protected lactone alcohols 46 can be isolated byworkup and purified if desired. When W⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾ is a gamma- ordelta-lactone group of the formula:

protected lactone alcohols 46 can be synthesized by deprotonating thecorresponding lactone with a strong base providing the lactone enolateand reacting the enolate with electrophilic protected alcohols 44 (for adetailed discussion of enolate formation of active methylene compoundssuch as lactones, see House Modern Synthetic Reactions; W. A. Benjamin,Inc. Philippines 1972 pp. 492-570, and for a discussion of reaction oflactone enolates with electrophiles such as carbonyl compounds, seeMarch, J. Advanced Organic Chemistry; Reactions Mechanisms, andStructure, 4th ed., 1992, pp. 944-945, both of which are incorporatedherein by reference). Lactone-enolate formation can be accomplished byadding about 1 equivalent of a strong organometallic base, preferablywith a pK_(a) of about 25 or more, more preferably with a pK_(a) ofgreater than about 35, to a mixture comprising a suitable organicsolvent and the lactone. Suitable bases include, but are not limited to,alkylmetal bases such as methyllithium, n-butyllithium,tert-butyllithium, sec-butyllithium, phenyllithium, phenyl sodium, andphenyl potassium; metal amide bases such as lithium amide, sodium amide,potassium amide, lithium tetramethylpiperidide, lithiumdiisopropylamide, lithium diethylamide, lithium dicyclohexylamide,sodium hexamethyldisilazide, and lithium hexamethyldisilazide; andhydride bases such as sodium hydride and potassium hydride, preferablylithium tetramethylpiperidide. Solvents suitable for lactone-enolateformation include, but are not limited to, diethyl ether andtetrahydrofuran. After enolate formation, the reaction-mixturetemperature is adjusted to within the range of about −78° C. to aboutroom temperature, preferably about −50° C. to about 0° C., andelectrophilic protected alcohols 44 (diluted with a solvent or inundiluted form) are added, preferably at a rate such that thereaction-mixture temperature remains within about one to two degrees ofthe initial reaction-mixture temperature. The reaction mixture isstirred for a period of about 15 minutes to about 5 hours, during whichtime the reaction's progress can be followed by using an appropriateanalytical technique, such as thin layer chromatography or highperformance liquid chromatography. When the reaction is deemedsubstantially complete, protected lactone alcohols 46 can be isolated byworkup and purified if desired. When W⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾ is a lactone group of theformula:

protected lactone alcohols 46 can be prepared from aldehydes 45according to the procedure described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,622,338, herebyexpressly incorporated herein by reference.

When W⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾ is a gamma- or delta-lactone group of the formula:

protected lactone alcohols 46 can be prepared according to a three stepsequence. The first step comprises base-mediated reaction ofelectrophilic protected alcohols 44 with succinic acid esters (i.e.,R⁹O₂CCH₂CH₂CO₂R⁹, wherein R⁹ is alkyl) or glutaric acid esters (i.e.,R⁹O₂CCH₂CH₂CH₂CO₂R⁹, wherein R⁹ is alkyl) providing a diesterintermediate of the formula 44i:

wherein x is 1 or 2 depending on whether the gamma or delta lactonegroup is desired. The reaction can be performed by adding about 1equivalent of a strong organometallic base, preferably with a pK_(a) ofabout 25 or more, more preferably with a pK_(a) of greater than about35, to a mixture comprising a suitable organic solvent and the succinicor glutaric acid ester. Suitable bases include, but are not limited to,alkylmetal bases such as methyllithium, n-butyllithium,tert-butyllithium, sec-butyllithium, phenyllithium, phenyl sodium, andphenyl potassium; metal amide bases such as lithium amide, sodium amide,potassium amide, lithium tetramethylpiperidide, lithiumdiisopropylamide, lithium diethylamide, lithium dicyclohexylamide,sodium hexamethyldisilazide, and lithium hexamethyldisilazide; andhydride bases such as sodium hydride and potassium hydride, preferablylithium tetramethylpiperidide. Suitable solvents include, but are notlimited to, diethyl ether and tetrahydrofuran. After enolate formation,the reaction-mixture temperature is adjusted to within the range ofabout −78° C. to about room temperature, preferably about −50° C. toabout 0° C., and electrophilic protected alcohols 44 (diluted with asolvent or in undiluted form) are added, preferably at a rate such thatthe reaction-mixture temperature remains within about one to two degreesof the initial reaction-mixture temperature. The reaction mixture isstirred for a period of about 15 minutes to about 5 hours, during whichtime the reaction's progress can be followed by using an appropriateanalytical technique, such as thin layer chromatography or highperformance liquid chromatography. When the reaction is deemedsubstantially complete, the diester intermediate can be isolated bywork-up and purified if desired. In the second step, the intermediatediester can be reduced, with a hydride reducing agent, to yield a diol:

The reduction can be performed according to the procedures referenced inMarch, J. Advanced Organic Chemistry; Reactions Mechanisms, andStructure, 4th ed., 1992, p. 1214, incorporated herein by reference).Suitable reducing agents include, but are not limited to, lithiumaluminum hydride, diisobutylaluminum hydride, sodium borohydride, andlithium borohydride). In the third step, the diol can be oxidativelycyclized with RuH₂(PPh₃)₄ to the product protected lactone alcohols 46according to the procedure of Yoshikawa et al., 1986, J. Org. Chem.51:2034 and Yoshikawa et al., 1983, Tetrahedron Lett. 26:2677, both ofwhich citations are incorporated herein by reference. When W⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾ is alactone group of the formula:

protected lactone alcohols 46 can be synthesized by reacting theGrignard salts of electrophilic protected alcohols 44, where E is ahalide, with 5,6-dihydro-2H-pyran-2-one, commercially available (e.g.,Aldrich Chemical Co., Milwaukee, Wis.), in the presence of catalyticamounts of a1-dimethylaminoacetyl)pyrolidine-2yl)methyl-diarylphosphine-copper (I)iodide complex as described in Tomioka et al., 1995, Tetrahedron Lett.36:4275, incorporated herein by reference.

Scheme 12 illustrates the synthesis of alcohol II. The alcohol 47 isinitially converted to a halogen 48. See Larock, Comprehensive OrganicTransformations, VCH: New York, 1989, pp. 360-362; all referencesdisclosed therein are incorporated herein by reference. The halide 48 isthen converted to a carboxylic acid 49 with subsequent conversion to aacyl halide 50. See Larock, Comprehensive Organic Transformations, VCH:New York, 1989, pp. 850-851, 855-856, 859-860, 977, 980, and 985; allreferences disclosed therein are incorporated herein by reference. Theacyl halide 50 is then coupled with the halide to afford compound II′.See Rappoport, The Chemistry of the Functional Groups. Supp. D, pt. 2;Wiley: New York, 1983; House, Modern Synthetic Reactions, 2^(nd) Ed.Benjamin: New York, 1972, pp. 691-694, 734-765, which are incorporatedherein by reference. Finally, compounds II′ are reduced using methodsknown to those of ordinary skill in the art to afford alcohol II. SeeLarock, Comprehensive Organic Transformations; VCH: New York, 1989.

In a typical procedure, the ketone II′ is dissolved in an organicsolvent such as, but not limited to, toluene, xylene, diethyl ether,t-butyl methyl ether, diglyme, methanol, ethanol, dichloromethane,chloroform, dichloroethane, preferably diethyl ether, and it is thentreated with a reducing agent such as, but not limited to, lithiumaluminum hydride, sodium borohydride, lithium borohydride, preferablysodium borohydride. When the reaction is complete, as determined by ananalytical method such as HPLC, gas chromatography, thin layerchromatography, or NMR, the mixture is subjected to work-up. Thecompound thus obtained can be purified by various purification methodsknown in the field, such as chromatography or recrystallization. It isreadily recognized that the alcohol compound II can exist asenantiomers. Separation of the stereoisomers (i.e., enantiomers) can beachieved by methods known in the art, for example, conversion to achiral salt and crystallization, chiral chromatography, or chiral HPLC.

Scheme 13 depicts the synthesis of compounds IIIa, that is, compoundsIII where a double bond is not present in the ring. In the first step,compounds 53, prepared as discussed in Schemes 1 to 6 above, can beconverted to compounds 54 by standard oxidation of the primary alcoholto an aldehyde group. Such oxidations are described in M. Hudlicky,Oxidations in Organic Chemistry, ACS Monograph 186, 1990, pp. 114-127,hereby expressly incorporated herein by reference. In the next stepGrignard reaction of 54 with 55 followed by standard OH protection gives57. Compounds 55 are commercially available (e.g., from Aldrich ChemicalCo. Milwakee, Wis.) or can be readily prepared by standard syntheticmethodology. For exemplary procedures for Grignard reactions see March,J. Advanced Organic Chemistry; Reactions Mechanisms, and Structure, 4thed., 1992, pp. 920-929, incorporated herein by reference. Similarly, inthe next step, the Grignard salt of 57 is condensed with 58 to provide59. Next 59 is oxidized and then cyclized to 60. When p is one,exemplary cyclization procedures are found in Friedrichsen, W. inComprehensive Heterocyclic Chemistry II; Katritzky, A. R.; Rees, W. C.;Scriven, E. F. V. Eds.; Pergamon Press: Oxford, 1996; Vol. 2, p 351, andComprehensive Heterocyclic Chemistry; Katritzky, A. R.; Rees, W. C.Eds.; Pergamon Press: Oxford, 1986; Vol. 3. When p is 0, cyclizationprocedures are found in Hepworth, J. D. in Comprehensive HeterocyclicChemistry II; Katritzky, A. R.; Rees, W. C.; Scriven, E. F. V. Eds.;Pergamon Press: Oxford, 1996; Vol. 5, p 351 and ComprehensiveHeterocyclic Chemistry; Katritzky, A. R.; Rees, W. C. Eds.; PergamonPress: Oxford, 1986; Vol. 3, all of which citations are hereby expresslyincorporated herein by reference.

The hydroxy ketone is subjected to cyclization, as described in theabove Hepworth, J. D. in Comprehensive Heterocyclic Chemistry II;Katritzky, A. R.; Rees, W. C.; Scriven, E. F. V. Eds.; Pergamon Press:Oxford, 1996; Vol. 5, p 386. For compounds III where W⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾ isHO(CH₂)_(n)—R¹R²: The hydroxy group is first deprotected as described inGreene, T. W., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 3rd edition(1999). For other structures, where Y is a group such as an acid,aldehydes, etc., protection is needed (acids as esters, preferablypivaloyl, aldehydes as silyl derivatives such as TIPS, stable in bothbasic and acidic conditions). When W⁽¹⁾⁽²⁾ is a lactone it can beintroduced as discussed in Scheme 3 above. The compounds are thencoupled to afford compound of the formula IIIa.

The reactions are performed under similar conditions for substitutedcyclic compounds. After the formation of the monocyclic compounds, theyare reacted in situ with electrophiles (e.g., MeI) at temperaturesbetween −40° C. to +60° C., for a reaction time of 1 hr to 5 days. Inaddition, double bonds can be selectively added or reduced or otherwisemanipulated by well known synthetic methods to give compounds III havingone or two selectively-placed double bonds (i.e., the double bond(s) canbe positioned in the desired location within the ring), for example, themethods disclosed in March, J. Advanced Organic Chemistry; ReactionsMechanisms, and Structure, 4th ed., 1992, pp. 771-780, incorporatedherein by reference. Finally, compounds IIIa are reduced using methodsknown to those of ordinary skill in the art to afford alcohol IIIa. SeeComprehensive Organic Transformations; VCH: New York, 1989. It isreadily recognized that the alcohol compound IIIa is stereoisomeric andcan therefore exist as enantiomers and diastereomer. Separation of thestereoisomers (i.e., enantiomers or diastereomers) can be achieved bymethods known in the art, for example, conversion to a chiral salt andcrystallization, chiral chromatography, or chiral HPLC.

Scheme 14 depicts the synthesis of compounds IV. In the first step,ketone compounds can be converted to compounds IV′ by treating with astrong base (e.g., LiHMDS, LDA) to generate the kinetic enolate followedby addition of the electrophile. In the next step, the ketone moiety ofcompound IV′ is reduced using standard methods known to those ofordinary skill in the art. For exemplary procedures for Grignardreaction see March, J. Advanced Organic Chemistry; Reactions Mechanisms,and Structure, 4th ed., 1992, incorporated herein by reference. See alsoComprehensive Heterocyclic Chemistry II; Katritzky, A. R.; Rees, W. C.;Scriven, E. F. V. Eds.; Pergamon Press: Oxford, 1996; Vol. 2, andComprehensive Heterocyclic Chemistry; Katritzky, A. R.; Rees, W. C.Eds.; Pergamon Press: Oxford, 1986; Vol. 3. Press: Oxford, 1996; Vol. 5.

It is readily recognized that the diol compound IV is stereoisomeric andcan therefore exist as enantiomers and diastereomers. Separation of thestereoisomers (i.e., enantiomers or diastereomers) can be achieved bymethods known in the art, for example, conversion to a chiral salt andcrystallization, chiral chromatography, or chiral HPLC.

Scheme 15 depicts the synthesis of compounds IV. In the first step,compounds of the type Br-compound 1, undergoes a Grignard reaction withdiethylorthoformate to give the ester compound. For exemplary proceduresfor Grignard reaction see March, J. Advanced Organic Chemistry;Reactions Mechanisms, and Structure, 4th ed., 1992, pp. 920-929,incorporated herein by reference. Similarly, in the next step, theGrignard salt of Br-compound 2 is condensed with the ester compound toprovide ketone V′.

The ketone is then reduced under standard conditions known in the art toafford compound V, for example, the methods disclosed in Organikum,Organisch-Chemisches Grundpraktikum, VEB Deutscher Verlag derWissenschaften, Berlin, 1984, p. 616; March, J. Advanced OrganicChemistry; Reactions Mechanisms, and Structure, 4th ed., 1992, andLarock Comprehensive Organic Transformations; VCH: New York, 1989, eachof which are incorporated herein by reference. It is readily recognizedthat the alcohol compound is stereoisomeric and can therefore exist asenantiomers and diastereomer. Separation of the stereoisomers (i.e.,enantiomers or diastereomers) can be achieved by methods known in theart, for example, conversion to a chiral salt and crystallization,chiral chromatography, or chiral HPLC. In a typical procedure, thealcohol compounds are dissolved in the appropriate solvent, such asmethanol, ethanol, isopropanol, preferably isopropanol, and is treatedwith a reducing agent, preferably sodium borohydride at temperaturesbetween about −20° C. and solvent reflux, preferably at about −5° C. toabout 10° C. When the reaction is considered complete by an analyticalmethod such as HPLC, GC, TLC, or NMR, the reaction is subject to work-upknown in the art.

Halides 48 (prepared as described in Dasseux and Oniciu, U.S. Pat. No.6,410,802, 2002) are treated with diethyl malonate anion (obtained fromdiethyl malonate and a dehydration agent such as sodium hydride, sodiumor potassium methoxide, ethoxide or t-butoxide) in an anhydrous solventsuch as DMSO, alcohol (methanol, ethanol or t-butanol) or a hydrocarbon(heptane, xylene, toluene) or an ether (THF, diethyl ether), preferablysodium hydride in DMSO, at room temperature or at temperatures up to thereflux of the solvent, for two hours up to 72 hours. The reaction ismonitored by usual analytical methods such as tlc, GC and HPLC, and itis stopped when no significant change of the reaction mixture is seen byone of these methods. The reaction is performed sequentially when anunsymmetrical derivative is desired. Intermediates of type A areprepared as described above by using 1 to 1.2 equivalents of dehydratingagent and halide 48; in order to afford compounds of type B, when thisreaction is deemed complete by one of the analytical methods mentionedabove, a second mole of dehydrating agent is added followed by 1 to 1.2equivalents of the second halide 48A. This type of compounds may bepurified by column chromatography or by HPLC, or use as crude in thenext step. The ester moieties in intermediate B thus obtained arehydrolysed by usual methods such as basic hydrolysis, to afford diacidsof type C that could be either purified by usual methods, e.g. columnchromatography or preparative HPLC, or decarboxilated as crude. Thedecarboxilation is performed either neat at temperatures from 150 to220° C., or in a solvent. Monoacid D thus obtained is finally reducedmore commonly with metals and proton donors or with reducing agents suchas lithium aluminum hydride in ether or tetrahydrofuran to give thedesired compounds of type E. Symmetrical derivatives may be preparedsimilarly, by using 2.2 to 3 equivalents halide 48, when intermediate Bis formed directly. If intermediate D is treated with an alkyl lithiumalcohol F is then obtained.

Diethyl malonate and G were treated with NaH/Bu4NI in anhydrous DMSO (asdescribed in Possel, O.; van Leusen, A. M. Tetrahedron Lett. 1977, 18,4229-4232; Kurosawa, K.; Suenaga, M.; Inazu, T.; Yoshino, T. TetrahedronLett. 1982, 23, 5335-5338) at room temperature for 16 h to afford H(99%, crude); this intermediate was hydrolysed in acid conditions (e.g.hydrochloric acid) to give intermediate I (for a general description ofthe method see Vogel's Practical Organic Chemistry, 4th Edition, LongmanInc.: New York 1978, pp. 494). Subsequent hydrolysis of the ester groupsin the presence of potassium hydroxide affords intermediate J [for ageneral method see Vogel's Practical Organic Chemistry, 4th Edition,Longman Inc.: New York 1978, pp 491). Decarboxylation of the abovecompound is accomplished by heating neat at 200° C. to yield themonoacid intermediate K that is reduced by LiAlH4 in tetrahydrofuran tothe target compound L.

The intermediate F1 synthesized as described above was reacted withmethyl lithium to give7-(1-hydroxy-1-methyl-ethyl)-2,2,12,12-tetramethyl-tridecane-1,13-diol(F2) together with F3. The two compounds were separated by columnchromatography.

Compounds of type E are also obtained as described in Scheme 19 bytreating the ketones of type M with a Wittig reagent, followed by ananti-Markovnikov addition of water to the marginal double bond thuscreated or by hydroboration with a Brown reagent.

Scheme 20 presents an example for the above method in the synthesis of7-hydroxymethyl-2,2,12,12-tetramethyl-tridecanedioic acid (R).

2,2,12,12-Tetramethyl-7-oxo-tridecanedioic acid diethyl ester O (Dasseuxand Oniciu, U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/976,938, Oct. 11, 2001was treated with Wittig reagent (methyltriphenylphosphonium iodide andphenyllithium) [Leopold, E. J. Organic Syntheses Collective Volume VII,Wiley: New York 1986, pp 258.] to produce P. Compound Q was prepared bytreatment of compound P with BH₃-Me₂S [Dalko, P. I.; Langlois, Y. J.Org. Chem. 1998, 63, 8107]. Other selective hydroboration method for thepreparation of primary alcohol Q is performed by treating the alkenewith disiamylborane (prepared from diborane and 2-methyl-2-butene in THFat −30° C.) in THF, as reported in Leopold, E. J. Organic SynthesesCollective Volume VII, Wiley: New York 1986, pp 258. Hydrolysis of Q bytreatment with KOH in ethanol gave the final compound R [Vogel'sPractical Organic Chemistry, 4th Edition, Longman Inc.: New York 1978,pp 492].

5.2 Therapeutic Uses of Compounds or Compositions of the Invention

In accordance with the invention, a compound of the invention or acomposition of the invention, comprising a compound of the invention anda pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle, is administered to a patient,preferably a human, with or at risk of aging, Alzheimer's Disease,cancer, cardiovascular disease, diabetic nephropathy, diabeticretinopathy, a disorder of glucose metabolism, dyslipidemia,dyslipoproteinemia, enhancing bile production, enhancing reverse lipidtransport, hypertension, impotence, inflammation, insulin resistance,lipid elimination in bile, modulating C reactive protein, obesity,oxysterol elimination in bile, pancreatitis, Parkinson's disease, aperoxisome proliferator activated receptor-associated disorder,phospholipid elimination in bile, renal disease, septicemia, metabolicsyndrome disorders (e.g., Syndrome X), a thrombotic disorder,gastrointestinal disease, irritable bowel syndrome (IBS), inflammatorybowel disease (e.g., Crohn's Disease, ulcerative colitis), arthritis(e.g., rheumatoid arthritis, osteoarthritis), autoimmune disease (e.g.,systemic lupus erythematosus), scleroderma, ankylosing spondylitis, goutand pseudogout, muscle pain: polymyositis/polymyalgiarheumatica/fibrositis; infection and arthritis, juvenile rheumatoidarthritis, tendonitis, bursitis and other soft tissue rheumatism. In oneembodiment, “treatment” or “treating” refers to an amelioration of adisease or disorder, or at least one discernible symptom thereof. Inanother embodiment, “treatment” or “treating” refers to inhibiting theprogression of a disease or disorder, either physically, e.g.,stabilization of a discernible symptom, physiologically, e.g.,stabilization of a physical parameter, or both.

In certain embodiments, the compounds of the invention or thecompositions of the invention are administered to a patient, preferablya human, as a preventative measure against such diseases. As usedherein, “prevention” or “preventing” refers to a reduction of the riskof acquiring a given disease or disorder. In a preferred mode of theembodiment, the compositions of the present invention are administeredas a preventative measure to a patient, preferably a human having agenetic predisposition to a aging, Alzheimer's Disease, cancer,cardiovascular disease, diabetic nephropathy, diabetic retinopathy, adisorder of glucose metabolism, dyslipidemia, dyslipoproteinemia,enhancing bile production, enhancing reverse lipid transport,hypertension, impotence, inflammation, insulin resistance, lipidelimination in bile, modulating C reactive protein, obesity, oxysterolelimination in bile, pancreatitis, Parkinson's disease, a peroxisomeproliferator activated receptor-associated disorder, phospholipidelimination in bile, renal disease, septicemia, metabolic syndromedisorders (e.g., Syndrome X), a thrombotic disorder, inflammatoryprocesses and diseases like gastrointestinal disease, irritable bowelsyndrome (IBS), inflammatory bowel disease (e.g., Crohn's Disease,ulcerative colitis), arthritis (e.g., rheumatoid arthritis,osteoarthritis), autoimmune disease (e.g., systemic lupuserythematosus), scleroderma, ankylosing spondylitis, gout andpseudogout, muscle pain: polymyositis/polymyalgia rheumatica/fibrositis;infection and arthritis, juvenile rheumatoid arthritis, tendonitis,bursitis and other soft tissue rheumatism. Examples of such geneticpredispositions include but are not limited to the ε4 allele ofapolipoprotein E, which increases the likelihood of Alzheimer's Disease;a loss of function or null mutation in the lipoprotein lipase genecoding region or promoter (e.g., mutations in the coding regionsresulting in the substitutions D9N and N291S; for a review of geneticmutations in the lipoprotein lipase gene that increase the risk ofcardiovascular diseases, dyslipidemias and dyslipoproteinemias, seeHayden and Ma, 1992, Mol. Cell Biochem. 113:171-176); and familialcombined hyperlipidemia and familial hypercholesterolemia.

In another preferred mode of the embodiment, the compounds of theinvention or compositions of the invention are administered as apreventative measure to a patient having a non-genetic predisposition toa aging, Alzheimer's Disease, cancer, cardiovascular disease, diabeticnephropathy, diabetic retinopathy, a disorder of glucose metabolism,dyslipidemia, dyslipoproteinemia, enhancing bile production, enhancingreverse lipid transport, hypertension, impotence, inflammation, insulinresistance, lipid elimination in bile, modulating C reactive protein,obesity, oxysterol elimination in bile, pancreatitis, Parkinson'sdisease, a peroxisome proliferator activated receptor-associateddisorder, phospholipid elimination in bile, renal disease, septicemia,metabolic syndrome disorders (e.g., Syndrome X), a thrombotic disorder,inflammatory processes and diseases like gastrointestinal disease,irritable bowel syndrome (IBS), inflammatory bowel disease (e.g.,Crohn's Disease, ulcerative colitis), arthritis (e.g., rheumatoidarthritis, osteoarthritis), autoimmune disease (e.g., systemic lupuserythematosus), scleroderma, ankylosing spondylitis, gout andpseudogout, muscle pain: polymyositis/polymyalgia rheumatica/fibrositis;infection and arthritis, juvenile rheumatoid arthritis, tendonitis,bursitis and other soft tissue rheumatism. Examples of such non-geneticpredispositions include but are not limited to cardiac bypass surgeryand percutaneous transluminal coronary angioplasty, which often lead torestenosis, an accelerated form of atherosclerosis; diabetes in women,which often leads to polycystic ovarian disease; and cardiovasculardisease, which often leads to impotence. Accordingly, the compositionsof the invention may be used for the prevention of one disease ordisorder and concurrently treating another (e.g., prevention ofpolycystic ovarian disease while treating diabetes; prevention ofimpotence while treating a cardiovascular disease).

5.2.1 Treatment of Cardiovascular Diseases

The present invention provides methods for the treatment or preventionof a cardiovascular disease, comprising administering to a patient atherapeutically effective amount of a compound or a compositioncomprising a compound of the invention and a pharmaceutically acceptablevehicle. As used herein, the term “cardiovascular diseases” refers todiseases of the heart and circulatory system. These diseases are oftenassociated with dyslipoproteinemias and/or dyslipidemias. Cardiovasculardiseases which the compositions of the present invention are useful forpreventing or treating include but are not limited to arteriosclerosis;atherosclerosis; stroke; ischemia; endothelium dysfunctions, inparticular those dysfunctions affecting blood vessel elasticity;peripheral vascular disease; coronary heart disease; myocardialinfarcation; cerebral infarction and restenosis.

5.2.2 Treatment of Dyslipidemias

The present invention provides methods for the treatment or preventionof a dyslipidemia comprising administering to a patient atherapeutically effective amount of a compound or a compositioncomprising a compound of the invention and a pharmaceutically acceptablevehicle.

As used herein, the term “dyslipidemias” refers to disorders that leadto or are manifested by aberrant levels of circulating lipids. To theextent that levels of lipids in the blood are too high, the compositionsof the invention are administered to a patient to restore normal levels.Normal levels of lipids are reported in medical treatises known to thoseof skill in the art. For example, recommended blood levels of LDL, HDL,free triglycerides and others parameters relating to lipid metabolismcan be found at the web site of the American Heart Association and thatof the National Cholesterol Education Program of the National Heart,Lung and Blood Institute(http://www.americanheart.org/cholesterol/about_level.html andhttp://www.nhlbi.nih.gov/health/public/heart/chol/hbc_what.html,respectively). At the present time, the recommended level of HDLcholesterol in the blood is above 35 mg/dL; the recommended level of LDLcholesterol in the blood is below 130 mg/dL; the recommended LDL:HDLcholesterol ratio in the blood is below 5:1, ideally 3.5:1; and therecommended level of free triglycerides in the blood is less than 200mg/dL.

Dyslipidemias which the compositions of the present invention are usefulfor preventing or treating include but are not limited to hyperlipidemiaand low blood levels of high density lipoprotein (HDL) cholesterol. Incertain embodiments, the hyperlipidemia for prevention or treatment bythe compounds of the present invention is familial hypercholesterolemia;familial combined hyperlipidemia; reduced or deficient lipoproteinlipase levels or activity, including reductions or deficienciesresulting from lipoprotein lipase mutations; hypertriglyceridemia;hypercholesterolemia; high blood levels of urea bodies (e.g. β-OHbutyric acid); high blood levels of Lp(a) cholesterol; high blood levelsof low density lipoprotein (LDL) cholesterol; high blood levels of verylow density lipoprotein (VLDL) cholesterol and high blood levels ofnon-esterified fatty acids.

The present invention further provides methods for altering lipidmetabolism in a patient, e.g., reducing LDL in the blood of a patient,reducing free triglycerides in the blood of a patient, increasing theratio of HDL to LDL in the blood of a patient, and inhibiting saponifiedand/or non-saponified fatty acid synthesis, said methods comprisingadministering to the patient a compound or a composition comprising acompound of the invention in an amount effective alter lipid metabolism.

5.2.3 Treatment of Dyslipoproteinemias

The present invention provides methods for the treatment or preventionof a dyslipoproteinemia comprising administering to a patient atherapeutically effective amount of a compound or a compositioncomprising a compound of the invention and a pharmaceutically acceptablevehicle.

As used herein, the term “dyslipoproteinemias” refers to disorders thatlead to or are manifested by aberrant levels of circulatinglipoproteins. To the extent that levels of lipoproteins in the blood aretoo high, the compositions of the invention are administered to apatient to restore normal levels. Conversely, to the extent that levelsof lipoproteins in the blood are too low, the compositions of theinvention are administered to a patient to restore normal levels. Normallevels of lipoproteins are reported in medical treatises known to thoseof skill in the art.

Dyslipoproteinemias which the compositions of the present invention areuseful for preventing or treating include but are not limited to highblood levels of LDL; high blood levels of apolipoprotein B (apo B); highblood levels of Lp(a); high blood levels of apo(a); high blood levels ofVLDL; low blood levels of HDL; reduced or deficient lipoprotein lipaselevels or activity, including reductions or deficiencies resulting fromlipoprotein lipase mutations; hypoalphalipoproteinemia; lipoproteinabnormalities associated with diabetes; lipoprotein abnormalitiesassociated with obesity; lipoprotein abnormalities associated withAlzheimer's Disease; and familial combined hyperlipidemia.

The present invention further provides methods for reducing apo C-IIlevels in the blood of a patient; reducing apo C-III levels in the bloodof a patient; elevating the levels of HDL associated proteins, includingbut not limited to apo A-I, apo A-II, apo A-IV and apo E in the blood ofa patient; elevating the levels of apo E in the blood of a patient, andpromoting clearance of triglycerides from the blood of a patient, saidmethods comprising administering to the patient a compound or acomposition comprising a compound of the invention in an amounteffective to bring about said reduction, elevation or promotion,respectively.

5.2.4 Treatment of Glucose Metabolism Disorders

The present invention provides methods for the treatment or preventionof a glucose metabolism disorder, comprising administering to a patienta therapeutically effective amount of a compound or a compositioncomprising a compound of the invention and a pharmaceutically acceptablevehicle. As used herein, the term “glucose metabolism disorders” refersto disorders that lead to or are manifested by aberrant glucose storageand/or utilization. To the extent that indicia of glucose metabolism(i.e., blood insulin, blood glucose) are too high, the compositions ofthe invention are administered to a patient to restore normal levels.Conversely, to the extent that indicia of glucose metabolism are toolow, the compositions of the invention are administered to a patient torestore normal levels. Normal indicia of glucose metabolism are reportedin medical treatises known to those of skill in the art.

Glucose metabolism disorders which the compositions of the presentinvention are useful for preventing or treating include but are notlimited to impaired glucose tolerance; insulin resistance; insulinresistance related breast, colon or prostate cancer, diabetes, includingbut not limited to non-insulin dependent diabetes mellitus (NIDDM),insulin dependent diabetes mellitus (IDDM), gestational diabetesmellitus (GDM), and maturity onset diabetes of the young (MODY);pancreatitis; hypertension; polycystic ovarian disease; and high levelsof blood insulin and/or glucose.

The present invention further provides methods for altering glucosemetabolism in a patient, for example to increase insulin sensitivityand/or oxygen consumption of a patient, said methods comprisingadministering to the patient a compound or a composition comprising acompound of the invention in an amount effective to alter glucosemetabolism.

5.2.5 Treatment of PPAR-Associated Disorders

The present invention provides methods for the treatment or preventionof a PPAR-associated disorder, comprising administering to a patient atherapeutically effective amount of a compound or a compositioncomprising a compound of the invention and a pharmaceutically acceptablevehicle. As used herein, “treatment or prevention of PPAR associateddisorders” encompasses treatment or prevention of rheumatoid arthritis;multiple sclerosis; psoriasis; inflammatory bowel diseases; breast;colon or prostate cancer, low levels of blood HDL; low levels of blood,lymph and/or cerebrospinal fluid apo E; low blood, lymph and/orcerebrospinal fluid levels of apo A-I; high levels of blood VLDL; highlevels of blood LDL; high levels of blood triglyceride; high levels ofblood apo B; high levels of blood apo C-III and reduced ratio ofpost-heparin hepatic lipase to lipoprotein lipase activity. HDL may beelevated in lymph and/or cerebral fluid.

5.2.6 Treatment of Renal Diseases

The present invention provides methods for the treatment or preventionof a renal disease, comprising administering to a patient atherapeutically effective amount of a compound or a compositioncomprising a compound of the invention and a pharmaceutically acceptablevehicle. Renal diseases that can be treated by the compounds of thepresent invention include glomerular diseases (including but not limitedto acute and chronic glomerulonephritis, rapidly progressiveglomerulonephritis, nephrotic syndrome, focal proliferativeglomerulonephritis, glomerular lesions associated with systemic disease,such as systemic lupus erythematosus, Goodpasture's syndrome, multiplemyeloma, diabetes, neoplasia, sickle cell disease, and chronicinflammatory diseases), tubular diseases (including but not limited toacute tubular necrosis and acute renal failure, polycystic renaldiseasemedullary sponge kidney, medullary cystic disease, nephrogenicdiabetes, and renal tubular acidosis), tubulointerstitial diseases(including but not limited to pyelonephritis, drug and toxin inducedtubulointerstitial nephritis, hypercalcemic nephropathy, and hypokalemicnephropathy) acute and rapidly progressive renal failure, chronic renalfailure, nephrolithiasis, or tumors (including but not limited to renalcell carcinoma and ncphroblastoma). In a most preferred embodiment,renal diseases that are treated by the compounds of the presentinvention are vascular diseases, including but not limited tohypertension, nephrosclerosis, microangiopathic hemolytic anemia,atheroembolic renal disease, diffuse cortical necrosis, and renalinfarcts.

5.2.7 Treatment of Cancer

The present invention provides methods for the treatment or preventionof cancer, comprising administering to a patient a therapeuticallyeffective amount of a compound or a composition comprising a compound ofthe invention and a pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle. Types of cancerthat can be treated using a Compound of the Invention include, but arenot limited to, those listed in Table 2.

TABLE 2 Solid tumors, including but not limited to fibrosarcomamyxosarcoma liposarcoma chondrosarcoma osteogenic sarcoma chordomaangiosarcoma endotheliosarcoma lymphangiosarcomalymphangioendotheliosarcoma synovioma mesothelioma Ewing's tumorleiomyosarcoma rhabdomyosarcoma colon cancer colorectal cancer kidneycancer pancreatic cancer bone cancer breast cancer ovarian cancerprostate cancer esophogeal cancer stomach cancer oral cancer nasalcancer throat cancer squamous cell carcinoma basal cell carcinomaadenocarcinoma sweat gland carcinoma sebaceous gland carcinoma papillarycarcinoma papillary adenocarcinomas cystadenocarcinoma medullarycarcinoma bronchogenic carcinoma renal cell carcinoma hepatoma bile ductcarcinoma choriocarcinoma seminoma embryonal carcinoma Wilms' tumorcervical cancer uterine cancer testicular cancer small cell lungcarcinoma bladder carcinoma lung cancer epithelial carcinoma gliomaglioblastoma multiforme astrocytoma medulloblastoma craniopharyngiomaependymoma pinealoma hemangioblastoma acoustic neuroma oligodendrogliomameningioma skin cancer melanoma neuroblastoma retinoblastoma Blood-bornecancers, including but not limited to: acute lymphoblastic B-cellleukemia acute lymphoblastic T-cell leukemia acute myeloblastic leukemia“AML” acute promyelocytic leukemia “APL” acute monoblastic leukemiaacute erythroleukemic leukemia acute megakaryoblastic leukemia acutemyelomonocytic leukemia acute nonlymphocyctic leukemia acuteundifferentiated leukemia chronic myelocytic leukemia “CML” chroniclymphocytic leukemia “CLL” hairy cell leukemia multiple myeloma Acuteand chronic leukemias Lymphoblastic myelogenous lymphocytic myelocyticleukemias Lymphomas: Hodgkin's disease non-Hodgkin's Lymphoma Multiplemyeloma Waldenström's macroglobulinemia Heavy chain disease Polycythemiavera

Cancer, including, but not limited to, a tumor, metastasis, or anydisease or disorder characterized by uncontrolled cell growth, can betreated or prevented by administration of a Compound of the Invention.

5.2.8 Treatment of Other Diseases

The present invention provides methods for the treatment or preventionof Alzheimer's Disease, Syndrome X, septicemia, thrombotic disorders,obesity, pancreatitis, hypertension, inflammation, and impotence,comprising administering to a patient a therapeutically effective amountof a compound or a composition comprising a compound of the inventionand a pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle.

As used herein, “treatment or prevention of Alzheimer's Disease”encompasses treatment or prevention of lipoprotein abnormalitiesassociated with Alzheimer's Disease.

As used herein, “treatment or prevention of Syndrome X or MetabolicSyndrome” encompasses treatment or prevention of a symptom thereof,including but not limited to impaired glucose tolerance, hypertensionand dyslipidemia/dyslipoproteinemia.

As used herein, “treatment or prevention of septicemia” encompassestreatment or prevention of septic shock.

As used herein, “treatment or prevention of thrombotic disorders”encompasses treatment or prevention of high blood levels of fibrinogenand promotion of fibrinolysis.

In addition to treating or preventing obesity, the compositions of theinvention can be administered to an individual to promote weightreduction of the individual.

As used herein, “treatment or prevention of diabetic nephropathy”encompasses treating or preventing kidney disease that develops as aresult of diabetes mellitus (DM). Diabetes mellitus is a disorder inwhich the body is unable to metabolize carbohydrates (e.g., foodstarches, sugars, cellulose) properly. The disease is characterized byexcessive amounts of sugar in the blood (hyperglycemia) and urine;inadequate production and/or utilization of insulin; and by thirst,hunger, and loss of weight. Thus, the compounds of the invention canalso be used to treat or prevent diabetes mellitus.

As used herein, “treatment or prevention of diabetic retinopathy”encompasses treating or preventing complications of diabetes that leadto or cause blindness. Diabetic retinopathy occurs when diabetes damagesthe tiny blood vessels inside the retina, the light-sensitive tissue atthe back of the eye.

As used herein, “treatment or prevention of impotence” includes treatingor preventing erectile dysfunction, which encompasses the repeatedinability to get or keep an erection firm enough for sexual intercourse.The word “impotence” may also be used to describe other problems thatinterfere with sexual intercourse and reproduction, such as lack ofsexual desire and problems with ejaculation or orgasm. The term“treatment or prevention of impotence includes, but is not limited toimpotence that results as a result of damage to nerves, arteries, smoothmuscles, and fibrous tissues, or as a result of disease, such as, butnot limited to, diabetes, kidney disease, chronic alcoholism, multiplesclerosis, atherosclerosis, vascular disease, and neurologic disease.

As used herein, “treatment or prevention of hypertension” encompassestreating or preventing blood flow through the vessels at a greater thannormal force, which strains the heart; harms the arteries; and increasesthe risk of heart attack, stroke, and kidney problems. The termhypertension includes, but is not limited to, cardiovascular disease,essential hypertension, hyperpiesia, hyperpiesis, malignanthypertension, secondary hypertension, or white-coat hypertension.

As used herein, “treatment or prevention of inflammation” encompassestreating or preventing inflammation diseases including, but not limitedto, chronic inflammatory disorders of the joints including arthritis,e.g., rheumatoid arthritis and osteoarthritis; respiratory distresssyndrome, inflammatory bowel diseases such as ileitis, ulcerativecolitis and Crohn's disease; and inflammatory lung disorders such asasthma and chronic obstructive airway disease, inflammatory disorders ofthe eye such as corneal dystrophy, trachoma, onchocerciasis, uveitis,sympathetic ophthalmitis, and endophthalmitis; inflammatory disorders ofthe gum, e.g., periodontitis and gingivitis; tuberculosis; leprosy;inflammatory diseases of the kidney including glomerulonephritis andnephrosis; inflammatory disorders of the skin including acne,sclerodermatitis, psoriasis, eczema, photoaging and wrinkles;inflammatory diseases of the central nervous system, includingAIDS-related neurodegeneration, stroke, neurotrauma, Alzheimer'sdisease, encephalomyelitis and viral or autoimmune encephalitis;autoimmune diseases including immune-complex vasculitis, systemic lupusand erythematodes; systemic lupus erythematosus (SLE); and inflammatorydiseases of the heart such as cardiomyopathy.

5.3 Combination Therapy

In certain embodiments of the present invention, the compounds andcompositions of the invention can be used in combination therapy with atleast one other therapeutic agent. The compound of the invention and thetherapeutic agent can act additively or, more preferably,synergistically. In a preferred embodiment, a compound or a compositioncomprising a compound of the invention is administered concurrently withthe administration of another therapeutic agent, which can be part ofthe same composition as the compound of the invention or a differentcomposition. In another embodiment, a compound or a compositioncomprising a compound of the invention is administered prior orsubsequent to administration of another therapeutic agent. As many ofthe disorders for which the compounds and compositions of the inventionare useful in treating are chronic disorders, in one embodimentcombination therapy involves alternating between administering acompound or a composition comprising a compound of the invention and acomposition comprising another therapeutic agent, e.g., to minimize thetoxicity associated with a particular drug. The duration ofadministration of each drug or therapeutic agent can be, e.g., onemonth, three months, six months, or a year. In certain embodiments, whena composition of the invention is administered concurrently with anothertherapeutic agent that potentially produces adverse side effectsincluding but not limited to toxicity, the therapeutic agent canadvantageously be administered at a dose that falls below the thresholdat which the adverse side is elicited.

The present compositions can be administered together with a statin.Statins for use in combination with the compounds and compositions ofthe invention include but are not limited to atorvastatin, pravastatin,fluvastatin, lovastatin, simvastatin, and cerivastatin.

The present compositions can also be administered together with a PPARagonist, for example a thiazolidinedione or a fibrate.Thiazolidinediones for use in combination with the compounds andcompositions of the invention include but are not limited to 5 ((4 (2(methyl 2 pyridinylamino)ethoxy)phenyl)methyl) 2,4 thiazolidinedione,troglitazone, pioglitazone, ciglitazone, WAY 120,744, englitazone, AD5075, darglitazone, and rosiglitazone. Fibrates for use in combinationwith the compounds and compositions of the invention include but are notlimited to gemfibrozil, fenofibrate, clofibrate, or ciprofibrate. Asmentioned previously, a therapeutically effective amount of a fibrate orthiazolidinedione often has toxic side effects. Accordingly, in apreferred embodiment of the present invention, when a composition of theinvention is administered in combination with a PPAR agonist, the dosageof the PPAR agonist is below that which is accompanied by toxic sideeffects.

The present compositions can also be administered together with a bileacid binding resin. Bile acid binding resins for use in combination withthe compounds and compositions of the invention include but are notlimited to cholestyramine and colestipol hydrochloride. The presentcompositions can also be administered together with niacin or nicotinicacid. The present compositions can also be administered together with aRXR agonist. RXR agonists for use in combination with the compounds ofthe invention include but are not limited to LG 100268, LGD 1069, 9-cisretinoic acid, 2 (1 (3,5,5,8,8 pentamethyl 5,6,7,8 tetrahydro 2naphthyl) cyclopropyl) pyridine 5 carboxylic acid, or 4 ((3,5,5,8,8pentamethyl 5,6,7,8 tetrahydro 2 naphthyl)2 carbonyl) benzoic acid. Thepresent compositions can also be administered together with ananti-obesity drug. Anti-obesity drugs for use in combination with thecompounds of the invention include but are not limited to β-adrenergicreceptor agonists, preferably β-3 receptor agonists, fenfluramine,dexfenfluramine, sibutramine, bupropion, fluoxetine, and phentermine.The present compositions can also be administered together with ahormone. Hormones for use in combination with the compounds of theinvention include but are not limited to thyroid hormone, estrogen andinsulin. Preferred insulins include but are not limited to injectableinsulin, transdermal insulin, inhaled insulin, or any combinationthereof. As an alternative to insulin, an insulin derivative,secretagogue, sensitizer or mimetic may be used. Insulin secretagoguesfor use in combination with the compounds of the invention include butare not limited to forskolin, dibutryl cAMP or isobutylmethylxanthine(IBMX).

The present compositions can also be administered together with aphosphodiesterase type 5 (“PDE5”) inhibitor to treat or preventdisorders, such as but not limited to, impotence. In a particular,embodiment the combination is a synergistic combination of a compositionof the invention and a PDE5 inhibitor.

The present compositions can also be administered together with atyrophostine or an analog thereof. Tyrophostines for use in combinationwith the compounds of the invention include but are not limited totryophostine 51.

The present compositions can also be administered together withsulfonylurea-based drugs. Sulfonylurea-based drugs for use incombination with the compounds of the invention include, but are notlimited to, glisoxepid, glyburide, acetohexamide, chlorpropamide,glibornuride, tolbutamide, tolazamide, glipizide, gliclazide,gliquidone, glyhexamide, phenbutamide, and tolcyclamide. The presentcompositions can also be administered together with a biguanide.Biguanides for use in combination with the compounds of the inventioninclude but are not limited to metformin, phenformin and buformin.

The present compositions can also be administered together with anα-glucosidase inhibitor. α-glucosidase inhibitors for use in combinationwith the compounds of the invention include but are not limited toacarbose and miglitol.

The present compositions can also be administered together with an apoA-I agonist. In one embodiment, the apo A-I agonist is the Milano formof apo A-I (apo A-IM). In a preferred mode of the embodiment, the apoA-IM for administration in conjunction with the compounds of theinvention is produced by the method of U.S. Pat. No. 5,721,114 toAbrahamsen. In a more preferred embodiment, the apo A-I agonist is apeptide agonist. In a preferred mode of the embodiment, the apo A-Ipeptide agonist for administration in conjunction with the compounds ofthe invention is a peptide of U.S. Pat. No. 6,004,925 or 6,037,323 toDasseux.

The present compositions can also be administered together withapolipoprotein E (apo E). In a preferred mode of the embodiment, theapoE for administration in conjunction with the compounds of theinvention is produced by the method of U.S. Pat. No. 5,834,596 toAgeland.

In yet other embodiments, the present compositions can be administeredtogether with an HDL-raising drug; an HDL enhancer; or a regulator ofthe apolipoprotein A-I, apolipoprotein A-IV and/or apolipoprotein genes.

In one embodiment, the other therapeutic agent can be an antiemeticagent. Suitable antiemetic agents include, but are not limited to,metoclopromide, domperidone, prochlorperazine, promethazine,chlorpromazine, trimethobenzamide, ondansetron, granisetron,hydroxyzine, acethylleucine monoethanolamine, alizapride, azasetron,benzquinamide, bietanautine, bromopride, buclizine, clebopride,cyclizine, dimenhydrinate, diphenidol, dolasetron, meclizine,methallatal, metopimazine, nabilone, oxyperndyl, pipamazine,scopolamine, sulpiride, tetrahydrocannabinols, thiethylperazine,thioproperazine and tropisetron.

In another embodiment, the other therapeutic agent can be anhematopoietic colony stimulating factor. Suitable hematopoietic colonystimulating factors include, but are not limited to, filgrastim,sargramostim, molgramostim and erythropoietin alfa.

In still another embodiment, the other therapeutic agent can be anopioid or non-opioid analgesic agent. Suitable opioid analgesic agentsinclude, but are not limited to, morphine, heroin, hydromorphone,hydrocodone, oxymorphone, oxycodone, metopon, apomorphine, normorphine,etorphine, buprenorphine, meperidine, lopermide, anileridine,ethoheptazine, piminidine, betaprodine, diphenoxylate, fentanil,sufentanil, alfentanil, remifentanil, levotphanol, dextromethorphan,phenazocine, pentazocine, cyclazocine, methadone, isomethadone andpropoxyphene. Suitable non-opioid analgesic agents include, but are notlimited to, aspirin, celecoxib, rofecoxib, diclofinac, diflusinal,etodolac, fenoprofen, flurbiprofen, ibuprofen, ketoprofen, indomethacin,ketorolac, meclofenamate, mefanamic acid, nabumetone, naproxen,piroxicam and sulindac.

5.3.1 Combination Therapy of Cardiovascular Diseases

The present compositions can be administered together with a knowncardiovascular drug. Cardiovascular drugs for use in combination withthe compounds of the invention to prevent or treat cardiovasculardiseases include but are not limited to peripheral antiadrenergic drugs,centrally acting antihypertensive drugs (e.g., methyldopa, methyldopaHCl), antihypertensive direct vasodilators (e.g., diazoxide, hydralazineHCl), drugs affecting renin-angiotensin system, peripheral vasodilators,phentolamine, antianginal drugs, cardiac glycosides, inodilators (e.g.,amrinone, milrinone, enoximone, fenoximone, imazodan, sulmazole),antidysrhythmic drugs, calcium entry blockers, ranitine, bosentan, andrezulin.

5.3.2 Combination Therapy of Cancer

The present invention includes methods for treating cancer, comprisingadministering to an animal in need thereof an effective amount of aCompound of the Invention and another therapeutic agent that is ananti-cancer agent. Suitable anticancer agents include, but are notlimited to, those listed in Table 3.

TABLE 3 Alkylating agents Nitrogen mustards: Cyclophosphamide Ifosfamidetrofosfamide Chlorambucil Treos Nitrosoureas: carbustine (BCNU)Lomustine (CCNU) Alkylsulphonates Busulfan Treosulfan Triazenes:Dacarbazine Platinum containing compounds: Cisplatin carboplatin PlantAlkaloids Vinca alkaloids: Vicristine Vinblastine Vindesine VinorelbineTaxoids: paclitaxel Docetaxol DNA Topoisomerase InhibitorsEpipodophyllins: Etoposide Teniposide Topotecan 9-aminocamptothecincamptothecin crisnatol mitomycins: Mitomycin C Anti-metabolitesAnti-folates: DHFR inhibitors: METHOTREXATE Trimetrexate IMPdehydrogenase Inhibitors: Mycophenolic acid Tiazofurin Ribavirin EICARRibonuclotide reductase Inhibitors: Hydroxyurea deferoxamine Pyrimidineanalogs: Uracil analogs 5-Fluorouracil Floxuridine DoxifluridineRatitrexed Cytosine analogs cytarabine (ara C) Cytosine arabinosidefludarabine Purine analogs: mercaptopurine Thioguanine Hormonaltherapies: Receptor antagonists: Anti-estrogen Tamoxifen Raloxifenemegestrol goscrclin Leuprolide acetate LHRH agonists: flutamidebicalutamide Retinoids/Deltoids Vitamin D3 analogs: EB 1089 CB 1093 KH1060 Photodynamic therapies: vertoporfin (BPD-MA) Phthalocyaninephotosensitizer Pc4 Demethoxy-hypocrellin A (2BA-2-DMHA) Cytokines:Interferon-α Interferon-γ Tumor necrosis factor Others: Isoprenylationinhibitors: Lovastatin Dopaminergic neurotoxins:1-methyl-4-phenylpyridinium ion Cell cycle inhibitors: staurosporineActinomycines: Actinomycin D Dactinomycin Bleomycins: bleomycin A2Bleomycin B2 Peplomycin Anthracyclines: daunorubicin Doxorubicin(adriamycin) Idarubicin Epirubicin Pirarubicin Zorubicin MitoxantroneMDR inhibitors verapamil Ca²⁺ ATPase inhibitors: thapsigargin

In a specific embodiment, a composition of the invention furthercomprises one or more chemotherapeutic agents and/or is administeredconcurrently with radiation therapy. In another specific embodiment,chemotherapy or radiation therapy is administered prior or subsequent toadministration of a present composition, preferably at least an hour,five hours, 12 hours, a day, a week, a month, more preferably severalmonths (e.g., up to three months), subsequent to administration of acomposition of the invention.

In other embodiments, the invention provides methods for treating orpreventing cancer, comprising administering to an animal in need thereofan effective amount of a Compound of the Invention and achemotherapeutic agent. In one embodiment the chemotherapeutic agent isthat with which treatment of the cancer has not been found to berefractory. In another embodiment, the chemotherapeutic agent is thatwith which the treatment of cancer has been found to be refractory. TheCompounds of the Invention can be administered to an animal that hasalso undergone surgery as treatment for the cancer.

In one embodiment, the additional method of treatment is radiationtherapy.

In a specific embodiment, the Compound of the Invention is administeredconcurrently with the chemotherapeutic agent or with radiation therapy.In another specific embodiment, the chemotherapeutic agent or radiationtherapy is administered prior or subsequent to administration of aCompound of the Invention, preferably at least an hour, five hours, 12hours, a day, a week, a month, more preferably several months (e.g., upto three months), prior or subsequent to administration of a Compound ofthe Invention.

A chemotherapeutic agent can be administered over a series of sessions,any one or a combination of the chemotherapeutic agents listed in Table3 can be administered. With respect to radiation, any radiation therapyprotocol can be used depending upon the type of cancer to be treated.For example, but not by way of limitation, x-ray radiation can beadministered; in particular, high-energy megavoltage (radiation ofgreater that 1 MeV energy) can be used for deep tumors, and electronbeam and orthovoltage x-ray radiation can be used for skin cancers.Gamma-ray emitting radioisotopes, such as radioactive isotopes ofradium, cobalt and other elements, can also be administered.

Additionally, the invention provides methods of treatment of cancer witha Compound of the Invention as an alternative to chemotherapy orradiation therapy where the chemotherapy or the radiation therapy hasproven or can prove too toxic, e.g., results in unacceptable orunbearable side effects, for the subject being treated. The animal beingtreated can, optionally, be treated with another cancer treatment suchas surgery, radiation therapy or chemotherapy, depending on whichtreatment is found to be acceptable or bearable.

The Compounds of the Invention can also be used in an in vitro or exvivo fashion, such as for the treatment of certain cancers, including,but not limited to leukemias and lymphomas, such treatment involvingautologous stem cell transplants. This can involve a multi-step processin which the animal's autologous hematopoietic stem cells are harvestedand purged of all cancer cells, the patient's remaining bone-marrow cellpopulation is then eradicated via the administration of a high dose of aCompound of the Invention with or without accompanying high doseradiation therapy, and the stem cell graft is infused back into theanimal. Supportive care is then provided while bone marrow function isrestored and the animal recovers.

5.4 Surgical Uses

Cardiovascular diseases such as atherosclerosis often require surgicalprocedures such as angioplasty. Angioplasty is often accompanied by theplacement of a reinforcing a metallic tube shaped structure known as a“stent” into a damaged coronary artery. For more serious conditions,open heart surgery such as coronary bypass surgery may be required.These surgical procedures entail using invasive surgical devices and/orimplants, and are associated with a high risk of restenosis andthrombosis. Accordingly, the compounds and compositions of the inventionmay be used as coatings on surgical devices (e.g., catheters) andimplants (e.g., stents) to reduce the risk of restenosis and thrombosisassociated with invasive procedures used in the treatment ofcardiovascular diseases.

5.5 Veterinary and Livestock Uses

A composition of the invention can be administered to a non-human animalfor a veterinary use for treating or preventing a disease or disorderdisclosed herein.

In a specific embodiment, the non-human animal is a household pet. Inanother specific embodiment, the non-human animal is a livestock animal.In a preferred embodiment, the non-human animal is a mammal, mostpreferably a cow, horse, sheep, pig, cat, dog, mouse, rat, rabbit, orguinea pig. In another preferred embodiment, the non-human animal is afowl species, most preferably a chicken, turkey, duck, goose, or quail.

In addition to veterinary uses, the compounds and compositions of theinvention can be used to reduce the fat content of livestock to produceleaner meats. Alternatively, the compounds and compositions of theinvention can be used to reduce the cholesterol content of eggs byadministering the compounds to a chicken, quail, or duck hen. Fornon-human animal uses, the compounds and compositions of the inventioncan be administered via the animals' feed or orally as a drenchcomposition.

5.6 Therapeutic/Prophylactic Administration and Compositions

Due to the activity of the compounds and compositions of the invention,they are useful in veterinary and human medicine. As described above,the compounds and compositions of the invention are useful for thetreatment or prevention of aging, Alzheimer's Disease, cancer,cardiovascular disease, diabetic nephropathy, diabetic retinopathy, adisorder of glucose metabolism, dyslipidemia, dyslipoproteinemia,hypertension, impotence, inflammation, insulin resistance, lipidelimination in bile, modulating C reactive protein, obesity, oxysterolelimination in bile, pancreatitis, Parkinson's disease, a peroxisomeproliferator activated receptor-associated disorder, phospholipidelimination in bile, renal disease, septicemia, metabolic syndromedisorders (e.g., Syndrome X), a thrombotic disorder, enhancing bileproduction, enhancing reverse lipid transport, inflammatory processesand diseases like gastrointestinal disease, irritable bowel syndrome(IBS), inflammatory bowel disease (e.g., Crohn's Disease, ulcerativecolitis), arthritis (e.g., rheumatoid arthritis, osteoarthritis),autoimmune disease (e.g., systemic lupus erythematosus), scleroderma,ankylosing spondylitis, gout and pseudogout, muscle pain:polymyositis/polymyalgia rheumatica/fibrositis; infection and arthritis,juvenile rheumatoid arthritis, tendonitis, bursitis and other softtissue rheumatism.

The invention provides methods of treatment and prophylaxis byadministration to a patient of a therapeutically effective amount of acompound or a composition comprising a compound of the invention. Thepatient is an animal, including, but not limited, to an animal such acow, horse, sheep, pig, chicken, turkey, quail, cat, dog, mouse, rat,rabbit, guinea pig, etc., and is more preferably a mammal, and mostpreferably a human.

The compounds and compositions of the invention, are preferablyadministered orally. The compounds and compositions of the invention mayalso be administered by any other convenient route, for example, byintravenous infusion or bolus injection, by absorption throughepithelial or mucocutaneous linings (e.g., oral mucosa, rectal andintestinal mucosa, etc.) and may be administered together with anotherbiologically active agent. Administration can be systemic or local.Various delivery systems are known, e.g., encapsulation in liposomes,microparticles, microcapsules, capsules, etc., and can be used toadminister a compound of the invention. In certain embodiments, morethan one compound of the invention is administered to a patient. Methodsof administration include but are not limited to intradermal,intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intravenous, subcutaneous, intranasal,epidural, oral, sublingual, intranasal, intracerebral, intravaginal,transdermal, rectally, by inhalation, or topically, particularly to theears, nose, eyes, or skin. The preferred mode of administration is leftto the discretion of the practitioner, and will depend in-part upon thesite of the medical condition. In most instances, administration willresult in the release of the compounds of the invention into thebloodstream.

In specific embodiments, it may be desirable to administer one or morecompounds of the invention locally to the area in need of treatment.This may be achieved, for example, and not by way of limitation, bylocal infusion during surgery, topical application, e.g., in conjunctionwith a wound dressing after surgery, by injection, by means of acatheter, by means of a suppository, or by means of an implant, saidimplant being of a porous, non-porous, or gelatinous material, includingmembranes, such as sialastic membranes, or fibers. In one embodiment,administration can be by direct injection at the site (or former site)of an atherosclerotic plaque tissue.

In certain embodiments, for example, for the treatment of Alzheimer'sDisease, it may be desirable to introduce one or more compounds of theinvention into the central nervous system by any suitable route,including intraventricular, intrathecal and epidural injection.Intraventricular injection may be facilitated by an intraventricularcatheter, for example, attached to a reservoir, such as an Ommayareservoir.

Pulmonary administration can also be employed, e.g., by use of aninhaler or nebulizer, and formulation with an aerosolizing agent, or viaperfusion in a fluorocarbon or synthetic pulmonary surfactant. Incertain embodiments, the compounds of the invention can be formulated asa suppository, with traditional binders and vehicles such astriglycerides.

In another embodiment, the compounds and compositions of the inventioncan be delivered in a vesicle, in particular a liposome (see Langer,1990, Science 249:1527 1533; Treat et al., in Liposomes in the Therapyof Infectious Disease and Cancer, Lopez-Berestein and Fidler (eds.),Liss, New York, pp. 353 365 (1989); Lopez Berestein, ibid., pp. 317 327;see generally ibid.).

In yet another embodiment, the compounds and compositions of theinvention can be delivered in a controlled release system. In oneembodiment, a pump may be used (see Langer, supra; Sefton, 1987, CRCCrit. Ref. Biomed. Eng. 14:201; Buchwald et al., 1980, Surgery 88:507Saudek et al., 1989, N. Engl. J. Med. 321:574). In another embodiment,polymeric materials can be used (see Medical Applications of ControlledRelease, Langer and Wise (eds.), CRC Pres., Boca Raton, Fla. (1974);Controlled Drug Bioavailability, Drug Product Design and Performance,Smolen and Ball (eds.), Wiley, New York (1984); Ranger and Peppas, 1983,J. Macromol. Sci. Rev. Macromol. Chem. 23:61; see also Levy et al.,1985, Science 228:190; During et al., 1989, Ann. Neurol. 25:351; Howardet al., 1989, J. Neurosurg. 71:105). In yet another embodiment, acontrolled-release system can be placed in proximity of the target areato be treated, e.g., the liver, thus requiring only a fraction of thesystemic dose (see, e.g., Goodson, in Medical Applications of ControlledRelease, supra, vol. 2, pp. 115 138 (1984)). Other controlled-releasesystems discussed in the review by Langer, 1990, Science 249:1527 1533)may be used.

The present compositions will contain a therapeutically effective amountof a compound of the invention, optionally more than one compound of theinvention, preferably in purified form, together with a suitable amountof a pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle so as to provide the form forproper administration to the patient.

In a specific embodiment, the term “pharmaceutically acceptable” meansapproved by a regulatory agency of the Federal or a state government orlisted in the U.S. Pharmacopeia or other generally recognizedpharmacopeia for use in animals, and more particularly in humans. Theterm “vehicle” refers to a diluent, adjuvant, excipient, or carrier withwhich a compound of the invention is administered. Such pharmaceuticalvehicles can be liquids, such as water and oils, including those ofpetroleum, animal, vegetable or synthetic origin, such as peanut oil,soybean oil, mineral oil, sesame oil and the like. The pharmaceuticalvehicles can be saline, gum acacia, gelatin, starch paste, talc,keratin, colloidal silica, urea, and the like. In addition, auxiliary,stabilizing, thickening, lubricating and coloring agents may be used.When administered to a patient, the compounds and compositions of theinvention and pharmaceutically acceptable vehicles are preferablysterile. Water is a preferred vehicle when the compound of the inventionis administered intravenously. Saline solutions and aqueous dextrose andglycerol solutions can also be employed as liquid vehicles, particularlyfor injectable solutions. Suitable pharmaceutical vehicles also includeexcipients such as starch, glucose, lactose, sucrose, gelatin, malt,rice, flour, chalk, silica gel, sodium stearate, glycerol monostearate,talc, sodium chloride, dried skim milk, glycerol, propylene, glycol,water, ethanol and the like. The present compositions, if desired, canalso contain minor amounts of wetting or emulsifying agents, or pHbuffering agents.

The present compositions can take the form of solutions, suspensions,emulsion, tablets, pills, pellets, capsules, capsules containingliquids, powders, sustained-release formulations, suppositories,emulsions, aerosols, sprays, suspensions, or any other form suitable foruse. In one embodiment, the pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle is acapsule (see e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,698,155). Other examples of suitablepharmaceutical vehicles are described in “Remington's PharmaceuticalSciences” by E. W. Martin.

In a preferred embodiment, the compounds and compositions of theinvention are formulated in accordance with routine procedures as apharmaceutical composition adapted for intravenous administration tohuman beings. Typically, compounds and compositions of the invention forintravenous administration are solutions in sterile isotonic aqueousbuffer. Where necessary, the compositions may also include asolubilizing agent. Compositions for intravenous administration mayoptionally include a local anesthetic such as lignocaine to ease pain atthe site of the injection. Generally, the ingredients are suppliedeither separately or mixed together in unit dosage form, for example, asa dry lyophilized powder or water free concentrate in a hermeticallysealed container such as an ampoule or sachette indicating the quantityof active agent. Where the compound of the invention is to beadministered by intravenous infusion, it can be dispensed, for example,with an infusion bottle containing sterile pharmaceutical grade water orsaline. Where the compound of the invention is administered byinjection, an ampoule of sterile water for injection or saline can beprovided so that the ingredients may be mixed prior to administration.

Compounds and compositions of the invention for oral delivery may be inthe form of tablets, lozenges, aqueous or oily suspensions, granules,powders, emulsions, capsules, syrups, or elixirs. Compounds andcompositions of the invention for oral delivery can also be formulatedin foods and food mixes. Orally administered compositions may containone or more optionally agents, for example, sweetening agents such asfructose, aspartame or saccharin; flavoring agents such as peppermint,oil of wintergreen, or cherry; coloring agents; and preserving agents,to provide a pharmaceutically palatable preparation. Moreover, where intablet or pill form, the compositions may be coated to delaydisintegration and absorption in the gastrointestinal tract therebyproviding a sustained action over an extended period of time.Selectively permeable membranes surrounding an osmotically activedriving compound are also suitable for orally administered compounds andcompositions of the invention. In these later platforms, fluid from theenvironment surrounding the capsule is imbibed by the driving compound,which swells to displace the agent or agent composition through anaperture. These delivery platforms can provide an essentially zero orderdelivery profile as opposed to the spiked profiles of immediate releaseformulations. A time delay material such as glycerol monostearate orglycerol stearate may also be used. Oral compositions can includestandard vehicles such as mannitol, lactose, starch, magnesium stearate,sodium saccharine, cellulose, magnesium carbonate, etc. Such vehiclesare preferably of pharmaceutical grade.

The amount of a compound of the invention that will be effective in thetreatment of a particular disorder or condition disclosed herein willdepend on the nature of the disorder or condition, and can be determinedby standard clinical techniques. In addition, in vitro or in vivo assaysmay optionally be employed to help identify optimal dosage ranges. Theprecise dose to be employed in the compositions will also depend on theroute of administration, and the seriousness of the disease or disorder,and should be decided according to the judgment of the practitioner andeach patient's circumstances. However, suitable dosage ranges for oraladministration are generally about 0.001 milligram to 2000 milligrams ofa compound of the invention per kilogram body weight. In specificpreferred embodiments of the invention, the oral dose is 0.01 milligramto 1000 milligrams per kilogram body weight, more preferably 0.1milligram to 100 milligrams per kilogram body weight, more preferably0.5 milligram to 25 milligrams per kilogram body weight, and yet morepreferably 1 milligram to 10 milligrams per kilogram body weight. In amost preferred embodiment, the oral dose is 5 milligrams of a compoundof the invention per kilogram body weight. The dosage amounts describedherein refer to total amounts administered; that is, if more than onecompound of the invention is administered, the preferred dosagescorrespond to the total amount of the compounds of the inventionadministered. Oral compositions preferably contain 10% to 95% activeingredient by weight.

Suitable dosage ranges for intravenous (i.v.) administration are 0.01milligram to 1000 milligrams per kilogram body weight, 0.1 milligram to350 milligrams per kilogram body weight, and 1 milligram to 100milligrams per kilogram body weight. Suitable dosage ranges forintranasal administration are generally about 0.01 pg/kg body weight to1 mg/kg body weight. Suppositories generally contain 0.01 milligram to50 milligrams of a compound of the invention per kilogram body weightand comprise active ingredient in the range of 0.5% to 10% by weight.Recommended dosages for intradermal, intramuscular, intraperitoneal,subcutaneous, epidural, sublingual, intracerebral, intravaginal,transdermal administration or administration by inhalation are in therange of 0.001 milligram to 200 milligrams per kilogram of body weight.Suitable doses of the compounds of the invention for topicaladministration are in the range of 0.001 milligram to 1 milligram,depending on the area to which the compound is administered. Effectivedoses may be extrapolated from dose-response curves derived from invitro or animal model test systems. Such animal models and systems arewell known in the art.

The invention also provides pharmaceutical packs or kits comprising oneor more containers filled with one or more compounds of the invention.Optionally associated with such container(s) can be a notice in the formprescribed by a governmental agency regulating the manufacture, use orsale of pharmaceuticals or biological products, which notice reflectsapproval by the agency of manufacture, use or sale for humanadministration. In a certain embodiment, the kit contains more than onecompound of the invention. In another embodiment, the kit comprises acompound of the invention and another lipid-mediating compound,including but not limited to a statin, a thiazolidinedione, or afibrate.

The compounds of the invention are preferably assayed in vitro and invivo, for the desired therapeutic or prophylactic activity, prior to usein humans. For example, in vitro assays can be used to determine whetheradministration of a specific compound of the invention or a combinationof compounds of the invention is preferred for lowering fatty acidsynthesis. The compounds and compositions of the invention may also bedemonstrated to be effective and safe using animal model systems.

Other methods will be known to the skilled artisan and are within thescope of the invention.

The following examples are provided by way of illustration and notlimitation.

6. SYNTHETIC EXAMPLES 6.1 2,2,12,12-Tetramethyltridecane-1,7,13-triol

Under nitrogen atmosphere, to a suspension of lithium borohydride (2.65g, 122 mmol) in dichloromethane (60 mL) was added methanol (4.0 g, 125mmol) dropwise at room temperature over 30 min. The reaction mixture washeated at reflux and 2,2,12,12-tetramethyl-7-oxo-tridecanedioic aciddiethyl ester (10.0 g, 27 mmol) was introduced. Heating at refluxtemperature was continued overnight. The reaction mixture was cooled toroom temperature and hydrolyzed with saturated ammonium chloridesolution (100 mL). The layers were separated and the aqueous layer wasextracted with dichloromethane (3×50 mL). The combined organic layerswere washed with 2 N hydrochloric acid (100 mL) and saturated sodiumchloride solution (100 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate andconcentrated in vacuo to afford the crude product. The crude compoundwas purified by chromatography on silica (hexanes:ethyl acetate=40:60)to yield the pure product (5.8 g, 74%) as a white solid. M.p.: 72-74° C.¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 3.58 (br. m, 1H), 3.30 (s, 4H),1.80-1.64 (m, 3H), 1.56-1.15 (m, 16H), 0.86 (s, 12H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz,CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 71.87, 71.72, 38.71, 37.46, 35.11, 26.66, 24.18,24.05, 23.97. HRMS (LSIMS, gly): Calcd. for C₁7H₃7O₃ (MH+): 289.2743.found: 289.2756. HPLC: 90.6% purity.

6.2 2,2-Bis[5,5-dimethyl-6-(tetrahydropyran-2-yloxy)-hexyl]malonic AcidDiethyl Ester

Under nitrogen atmosphere, to a solution of2-(6-bromo-2,2-dimethylhexyloxy)-tetrahydropyran (17.6 g, 60 mmol) anddiethyl malonate (4.8 g, 30 mmol) in anhydrous dimethyl sulfoxide (145mL) was added sodium hydride (60% dispersion in mineral oil, 2.9 g, 72mmol) under cooling with a water bath. Tetra-n-butylammonium iodide (2.1g, 3.6 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred for 16 h at roomtemperature. The reaction mixture was carefully hydrolyzed with water(140 mL) under cooling with a water bath. The mixture was extracted withdiethyl ether (3 ′ 60 mL). The combined organic layers were washed withwater (4×50 mL) and brine (50 mL), dried over sodium sulfate, andconcentrated in vacuo, affording2,2-bis[5,5-dimethyl-6-(tetrahydropyran-2-yloxy)-hexyl]malonic aciddiethyl ester (17.3 g, 82%) as an oil. ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ(ppm): 4.41 (t, 2H, J=3.1 Hz), 4.01 (q, 4H, J=7.0 Hz), 3.82-3.70 (m,2H), 3.50-3.30 (m, 4H), 2.87 (d, 2H, J=9.1 Hz), 1.80-1.35 (m, 16H),1.30-0.95 (m, 18H), 0.88-0.74 (m, 12H). 13C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ(ppm): 172.0, 99.1, 76.6, 61.9, 60.9, 57.6, 39.2, 34.3, 32.3, 30.7,25.7, 25.0, 24.6, 24.6, 24.3, 19.5, 14.2.

6.3 2,2-Bis(6-hydroxy-5,5-dimethylhexyl)malonic Acid Diethyl Ester

A solution of2,2-bis[5,5-dimethyl-6-(tetrahydropyran-2-yloxy)-hexyl]malonic aciddiethyl ester (2.92 g, 5.0 mmol) in concentrated hydrochloric acid (2.4mL) and water (1.6 mL) was heated at reflux for 1 h. Ethanol (8.2 mL)was added and the reaction mixture was heated at reflux for 3 h. Thereaction mixture was diluted with water (20 mL) and extracted withdiethyl ether (3×20 mL). The combined organic layers were washed withwater (20 mL) and brine (20 mL), dried over sodium sulfate, andconcentrated in vacuo to afford2,2-bis(6-hydroxy-5,5-dimethylhexyl)malonic acid diethyl ester (1.74 g,84%) as an oil. ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 4.13 (q, 4H, J=7.2Hz), 3.25 (s, 4H), 2.42 (s, 2H), 1.90-1.75 (m, 4H), 1.30-1.12 (m, 18H),0.84 (s, 12H). 13C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 172.0, 71.7, 60.9,57.4, 38.2, 34.9, 32.1, 24.8, 24.0, 23.7, 14.0. HRMS (LSIMS, gly):Calcd. for C₂₃H₄₅O₆(MH+): 417.3216. found: 417.3210.

6.4 2,2-Bis(6-hydroxy-5,5-dimethylhexyl)malonic acid

To a stirred solution of potassium hydroxide (4.83 g, 75 mmol) in water(4.2 mL) and ethanol (15 mL) was added2,2-bis(6-hydroxy-5,5-dimethylhexyl)malonic acid diethyl ester (15.0 g).The reaction mixture was heated at reflux for 14 h. The ethanol wasremoved under reduced pressure and the aqueous solution was extractedwith chloroform (2×50 mL). The aqueous layer was acidified withhydrochloric acid to pH 1 and extracted with diethyl ether (3×50 mL).The ethereal phases were dried over magnesium sulfate and concentratedin vacuo to yield 2,2-bis(6-hydroxy-5,5-dimethylhexyl)malonic acid (7.8g, 82%) as a yellow solid. M.P.: 178-180° C. ¹H NMR (300 MHz,CD₃OD/TMS): δ (ppm): 4.86 (s br., 4H), 3.22 (s, 4H), 1.9-1.8 (m, 4H),1.36-1.10 (m, 12H), 0.84 (s, 12H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz, CD₃OD/TMS): δ (ppm):176.0, 72.0, 58.7, 39.8, 36.0, 34.1, 26.5, 25.5, 24.5. HRMS (LSIMS,gly): Calcd. for C₁₉H₃₇O₆(MH+): 361.2590. found: 361.2582.

6.5 8-Hydroxy-2-(6-hydroxy-5,5-dimethylhexyl)-7,7-dimethyloctanoic acid

Using an oil-bath, 2,2-bis(6-hydroxy-5,5-dimethylhexyl)malonic acid washeated to 200° C. for 30 min until the effervescence ceased. The product(4.04 g, 98%) was obtained as an oil. ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CD₃OD/TMS): δ(ppm): 4.88 (s br., 3H), 3.22 (s, 4H), 2.29 (m, 1H), 1.70-1.40 (m, 4H),1.4-1.1 (m, 12H), 0.84 (s, 12H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz, CD₃OD/TMS): δ (ppm):180.5, 72.1, 47.1, 39.9, 36.0, 33.8, 29.7, 25.0, 24.6. HRMS (LSIMS,gly): Calcd. for C₁₈H₃₇O₄ (MH+): 317.2692. found: 317.2689.

6.6 7-Hydroxymethyl-2,2,12,12-tetramethyltridecane-1,13-diol

Under nitrogen atmosphere, to a solution of lithium aluminum hydride(1.09 g, 28.8 mmol) in anhydrous THF (100 mL) was added dropwise asolution of8-hydroxy-2-(6-hydroxy-5,5-dimethylhexyl)-7,7-dimethyloctanoic acid(3.64 g, 11.5 mmol) in THF (40 mL) at room temperature. The reactionmixture was heated at reflux for 5 h and kept at room temperatureovernight. Water (100 mL) was added carefully to the reaction mixtureunder cooling with a water bath. The pH was adjusted to 1 with 2 Nhydrochloric acid. The product was extracted with diethyl ether (3×60mL). The combined organic layers were washed with water (2×50 mL) andbrine (50 mL). The ethereal solution was dried over sodium sulfate andconcentrated in vacuo to furnish the crude product (3.2 g), which waspurified by chromatography on silica (hexanes:ethyl acetate=50:50) toyield 7-hydroxymethyl-2,2,12,12-tetramethyltridecane-1,13-diol (3.0 g,86%) as a yellow oil. ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CD₃OD/TMS): δ (ppm): 4.88 (s,3H), 3.44 (d, 2H, J=4.8 Hz), 3.23 (s, 4H), 1.5-1.1 (m, 17H), 0.85 (s,12H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz, CD₃OD/TMS): δ (ppm): 72.0, 65.7, 41.7, 40.0,36.0, 32.2, 29.0, 25.4, 24.7, 24.6. HRMS (LSIMS, gly): Calcd. forC₁₈H₃₉O₃(MH+): 303.2899. found 303.2901. HPLC: 94.6% purity.

6.7 7-Hydroxy-2,2,12,12-tetramethyltridecanedioic acid diethyl ester

7-Oxo-2,2,12,12-tetramethyltridecanedioic acid diethyl ester (9.2 g, 25mmol) was dissolved in methanol (200 mL) and the solution was cooled inan ice-water bath. Sodium borohydride (0.95 g, 25 mmol) was added. After2 h, another portion of sodium borohydride (0.95 g, 25 mmol) was addedand stirring was continued for 2 h. The reaction mixture was hydrolyzedwith water (200 mL). The aqueous solution was extracted withdichloromethane (3×150 mL). The combined organic layers were dried overmagnesium sulfate and concentrated in vacuo to give the product (8.5 g,92%) as an oil. ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 4.11 (q, 4H, J=7.0Hz), 3.60-3.50 (m, 1H), 1.66-1.32 (m, 11H), 1.24 (pseudo-t, 12H, J=7.0Hz), 1.15 (s, 12H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 178.0, 71.7,60.1, 42.1, 40.6, 37.3, 26.0, 25.1, 24.9, 14.2. HRMS (LSIMS, nba):Calcd. for C₂₁H₄₁O₃ (MH+): 373.2954. found: 373.2936. HPLC: 88.90%purity.

6.8 7-Hydroxy-2,2,12,12-tetramethyltridecanedioic acid

To a homogeneous solution of potassium hydroxide (3.45 g, 61 mmol) inwater (3.3 mL) and ethanol (11.1 mL) was added7-hydroxy-2,2,12,12-tetramethyltridecanedioic acid diethyl ester (8.2 g,22 mmol) and the mixture was heated at reflux for 4 h. The mixture wasconcentrated in vacuo and the residue was extracted with diethyl ether(3×50 mL). The water layer was acidified with concentrated hydrochloricacid (6 mL) to pH 1. The product was extracted with diethyl ether (3 ′100 mL). The combined organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate andconcentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by columnchromatography (silica, dichloromethane:methanol=90:10) to give the pureproduct (6.6 g, 95%) as a colorless oil. ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ(ppm): 8.10 (br., 3H), 3.58 (br., 1H), 1.62-1.22 (m, 16H), 1.18 (s,12H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 184.3, 71.8, 42.1, 40.5,36.9, 25.9, 25.0, 24.9. HRMS (LSIMS, gly): Calcd. for C17H₃₃O₅ (MH+):317.2328. found 317.2330. HPLC: 90.4% purity.

6.9 2,2,12,12-Tetramethyl-7-methylene-tridecanedioic acid diethyl ester

Under nitrogen atmosphere, a solution of phenyllithium (in diethylether:cyclohexane=30:70, 7.06 mL, 1.8 M, 12.7 mmol) was added dropwiseover 10 min to a solution of methyltriphenylphosphonium iodide (5.52 g,13.3 mmol) in anhydrous THF (40 mL) at room temperature. The reactionmixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 min, before2,2,12,12-tetramethyl-7-oxo-tridecanedioic acid diethyl ester (4.5 g,12.2 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred for 5 h at 50°C. The resulting light-orange mixture was quenched by adding methanol(0.3 mL), and most of the solvent was removed on a rotary evaporator.The residue was purified by chromatography on silica (hexanes:ethylacetate=95:5) to furnish the product (2.1 g, 47%) as an oil. ¹H NMR (300MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 4.67 (s, 2H), 4.10 (q, 4H, J=7.3 Hz), 1.97 (t,4H, J=7.6 Hz), 1.6-1.3 (m, 8H), 1.30-1.15 (m, 10H), 1.15 (s, 12H). ¹³CNMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 178.0, 149.6, 108.6, 60.1, 42.1, 40.6,35.8, 28.2, 25.1, 24.7, 14.2. HRMS (LSIMS, nba): Calcd. for C₂₂H₄₁O₄(MH+): 369.3004. found 369.3009.

6.10 7-Hydroxymethyl-2,2,12,12-tetramethyltridecanedioic acid diethylester

Into a stirred solution of2,2,12,12-tetramethyl-7-methylene-tridecanedioic acid diethyl ester (3.7g, 10 mmol) in anhydrous THF (50 mL) was added borane-methyl sulfidecomplex (2.0 M in THF, 6 mL, 12 mmol) at room temperature and thesolution was stirred for 6 h under argon atmosphere. Hydrogen peroxide(50 wt. % solution in water, 9 mL, 144 mmol) and an aqueous solution ofsodium hydroxide (30 mL, 2.5 M, 75 mmol) were slowly introduced at 0-5°C. The reaction mixture was stirred for an additional h at roomtemperature and then extracted with dichloromethane (3×100 mL). Thecombined organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered,evaporated, and purified by column chromatography on silica(hexanes:ethyl acetate=95:5, then 90:10) to furnish the product (2.9 g,77%) as an oil. ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 4.11 (q, 4H, J=7.0Hz), 3.51 (d, 2H, J=5.4 Hz), 1.60-1.16 (m, 18H), 1.25 (t, 6H, J=7.0 Hz),1.15 (s, 12H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 178.0, 65.3, 60.1,42.0, 40.6, 40.4, 30.7, 27.2, 25.4, 25.1, 14.2. HRMS (LSIMS, nba):Calcd. for C₂₂H₄₃O₅ (MH+): 387.3110. found 387.3108.

6.11 7-Hydroxymethyl-2,12,12-tetramethyltridecanedioic acid

To a homogeneous solution of potassium hydroxide (1.18 g, 21 mmol) inwater (1.12 mL) and ethanol (3.8 mL) was added7-hydroxymethyl-2,2,12,12-tetramethyltridecanedioic acid diethyl ester(2.9 g, 7.5 mmol) and the reaction mixture was heated at reflux for 4 h.The mixture was concentrated in vacuo, cooled to room temperature, andthe residue was extracted with diethyl ether (2×50 mL). The pH of theaqueous layer was adjusted to 1 by addition of hydrochloric acid. Theproduct was extracted with diethyl ether (3×50 mL). The combined organiclayers were dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated in vacuo toafford the crude product which was purified by column chromatography onsilica (hexanes:ethyl acetate=60:40) to yield7-hydroxymethyl-2,2,12,12-tetramethyltridecanedioic acid (2.0 g, 81%) asan oil. ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 7.64 (br., 3H), 3.50 (d,2H, J=4.4 Hz), 1.60-1.20 (m, 17H), 1.16 (s, 12H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz,CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 184.3, 65.2, 42.1, 40.5, 40.1, 30.6, 27.1, 25.2,25.0. HRMS (LSIMS, nba): Calcd. for C₁₈H₃₅O₅ (MH+): 331.2484. found331.2484.

6.127-(1-Hydroxy-1-methylethyl)-2,2,12,12-tetramethyltridecane-1,13-diol

A solution of8-hydroxy-2-(6-hydroxy-5,5-dimethylhexyl)-7,7-dimethyloctanoic acid (1.0g, 3.16 mmol) in THF (40 mL) was cooled in an ice-water bath and methyllithium (1.4 M in diethyl ether, 27 mL, 37.8 mmol) was added in oneportion. The reaction mixture was stirred for 2 h at 0° C., then pouredinto dilute hydrochloric acid (5 mL concentrated hydrochloric acid/60 mLwater). The organic layer was separated and the aqueous layer wasextracted with diethyl ether (2×50 mL). The combined organic layers weredried over sodium sulfate and concentrated in vacuo to get the crudeproduct (1.0 g). The crude product was purified by column chromatographyon silica (hexanes:ethyl acetate=80:20, then 50:50) to give7-(1-hydroxy-1-methylethyl)-2,2,12,12-tetramethyltridecane-1,13-diol(0.40 g, 38%) as a white solid (together with7-acetyl-2,2,12,12-tetramethyltridecan-1,13-diol, 0.41 g, 41%). M.p.:72-74° C. ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 3.24 (s, 4H), 2.59 (br.,3H), 1.55-0.95 (m, 23H), 0.81 (s, 12H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ(ppm): 74.0, 71.5, 49.6, 38.4, 34.9, 31.2, 30.3, 27.1, 24.3, 23.9, 23.8.HRMS (LSIMS, gly): Calcd. for C₂₀H₄₃O₃(MH+): 331.3212. found: 331.3205.HPLC: 96.4% purity.

6.13 7-Bromo-2,2-dimethylheptanoic acid ethyl ester

Under argon atmosphere and cooling with an ice-bath, a solution oflithium diisopropylamide in THF (1.7 L, 2.0 M, 3.4 mol) was slowlydropped into a solution of 1,5-dibromopentane (950 g, 4.0 mol) and ethylisobutyrate (396 g, 3.4 mol) in THF (5 L) while keeping the temperaturebelow +5° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 20h and quenched by slow addition of saturated ammonium chloride solution(3 L). The resulting solution was divided into three 4-L portions. Eachportion was diluted with saturated ammonium chloride solution (5 L) andextracted with ethyl acetate (2×2 L). Each 4-L portion of ethyl acetatewas washed with saturated sodium chloride solution (2 L), 1 Nhydrochloric acid (2 L), saturated sodium chloride solution (2 L),saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (2 L), and saturated sodiumchloride solution (2 L). The three separate ethyl acetate layers werecombined into a single 12-L portion, dried over magnesium sulfate, andconcentrated in vacuo to give the crude material (1.7 L) which waspurified by vacuum distillation. Two fractions were obtained: the firstboiling at 88-104° C./0.6 torr (184.2 g), the second at 105-120° C./1.4torr (409.6 g) for a total yield of 60%. ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ(ppm): 4.11 (q, 2H, J=7.2 Hz), 3.39 (t, 2H, J=6.8 Hz), 1.85 (m, 2H),1.56-1.35 (m, 4H), 1.24 (t, 3H, J=7.2 Hz), 1.31-1.19 (m, 2H), 1.16 (s,6H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 177.9, 60.2, 42.1, 40.5,33.8, 32.6, 28.6, 25.2, 24.2, 14.3. HRMS (EI, pos): Calcd. forC₁₁H₂₂BrO₂ (MH+): 265.0803. found: 265.0810.

6.14 7-Bromo-2,2-dimethylheptan-1-ol

Under Ar atmosphere, to a stirred suspension solution of LiBH₄ (5.55 g,95%, 0.24 mol) in dichloromethane (80 mL) was added dropwise methanol(9.8 mL, 0.24 mol), keeping a gentle reflux while hydrogen gas wasformed. The mixture was stirred for 30 min at 45° C. To this solutionwas added dropwise a solution of 7-bromo-2,2-dimethylheptanoic acidethyl ester (43 g, 0.15 mol) in dichloromethane (120 mL) at such a rateas to maintain a gentle reflux. The reaction mixture was heated atreflux for 20 h, cooled to room temperature and carefully hydrolyzedwith 6 N hydrochloric acid (30 mL) and saturated ammonium chloridesolution (360 mL). The aqueous layer was extracted with dichloromethane(3×50 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with water (2 0 100mL) and dried over anhydrous MgSO4. The reaction mixture was evaporatedto yield crude 7-bromo-2,2-dimethylheptan-1-ol (36.2 g, 88%) as acolorless, viscous oil. ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 3.41 (t,2H, J=6.9 Hz), 3.30 (br. s, 2H), 1.90-1.84 (m, 3H), 1.42-1.22 (m, 6),0.86 (s, 6H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 71.9, 38.6, 35.1,34.1, 32.9, 29.2, 24.0, 23.2. HRMS (LSIMS, nba): Calcd. for C₉H₁₈Br(MH+−H₂O): 205.0592. found: 205.0563.

6.15 2-(7-Bromo-2,2-dimethylheptyloxy)-tetrahydropyran

To a solution of 7-bromo-2,2-dimethylheptan-1-ol (36.0 g, 133.0 mmol) indichloromethane (60 mL) was added p-toluenesulfonic acid (0.28 g, 1.3mmol) and 3,4-dihydro-2H-pyran (18.54 g, 213 mmol) at 5-10° C. undercooling with an ice-water bath. The mixture was stirred and allowed towarm to room temperature overnight. The reaction solution was filteredthrough neutral alumina (200 g), which was rinsed with dichloromethane(500 mL). Concentration of the solvent gave the crude product as a brownoil, which was subjected to column chromatography on silica gel (240 g)using hexanes:ethyl acetate (50:1) as eluent to yield2-(7-bromo-2,2-dimethylheptyloxy)-tetrahydropyran as a colorless oil(23.0 g, 48%). ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 4.54 (t, 1H, J=3.0Hz), 3.84 (m, 1H), 3.51-3.39 (m, 4H), 2.98 (d, 1H, J=9.3 Hz), 1.89-1.80(m, 3H), 1.70-1.40 (m, 7H), 1.29-1.22 (m, 4H), 0.89 (s, 6H). ¹³C NMR (75MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 99.3, 76.6, 62.1, 39.3, 34.3, 34.2, 33.0,30.8, 29.2, 25.7, 24.7, 23.2, 19.6. HRMS (LSIMS, nba): Calcd. forC₁₄H₂₇BrO₂: 307.1272. found: 307.1245.

6.16 8-Oxo-2,2,14,14-tetramethylpentadecane-1,15-diol

Under nitrogen atmosphere, to a solution of2-(7-bromo-2,2-dimethylheptyloxy)-tetrahydropyran (26.0 g, 39.4 mmol),tetra-n-butylammonium iodide (3.0 g, 8.1 mmol) and p-toluenesulfonylmethyl isocyanide (7.80 g, 39.4 mmol) in anhydrous DMSO (200 mL) wasadded sodium hydride (3.80 g, 20.5 mmol, 60% dispersion in mineral oil)in portions at 5-10° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at roomtemperature for 20 h and quenched with ice-water (400 mL). The productwas extracted with diethyl ether (3 □ 100 mL). The combined organiclayers were washed with water (200 mL) and saturated sodium chloridesolution (2×200 mL), dried over MgSO4, and concentrated in vacuo to getcrude2-[8-isocyano-2,2,14,14-tetramethyl-15-(tetrahydropyran-2-yloxy)-8-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-pentadecyloxy]-tetrahydropyran(28.2 g) as an orange oil, which was used without purification. Asolution of this crude product (28.0 g) and 48% sulfuric acid (46 g,from 12 mL of concentrated sulfuric acid and 24 mL of water) in methanol(115 mL) was stirred for 80 min at room temperature. The solution wasdiluted with ice-water (120 mL). The aqueous layer was extracted withdichloromethane (3×100 mL). The combined organic layers were washed withsaturated Na₂CO₃ solution (2×150 mL) and saturated NaCl solution (150mL). The organic solution was dried over MgSO4 and concentrated invacuo. The residue was purified by column chromatography (silica gel,hexanes:ethyl acetate=2:1) to give8-oxo-2,2,14,14-tetramethylpentadecane-1,15-diol (9.97 g, 80% over twosteps) as a colorless oil. ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 3.30(s, 4H), 2.39 (t, 4H, J=7.2 Hz), 2.07 (br. s, 2H), 1.60-1.55 (m, 4H),1.28-1.17 (m, 12H), 0.85 (s, 12H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm):212.0, 72.0, 43.0, 38.6, 35.2, 30.3, 24.0, 23.8. HRMS (LSIMS, gly):Calcd. for C₁₉H₃₉O₃ (MH+): 315.2899. found: 315.2886. HPLC: 94.7%purity.

6.17 2,2,14,14-Tetramethylpentadecane-1,8,15-triol

Under nitrogen atmosphere, a solution of8-oxo-2,2,14,14-tetramethylpentadecane-1,15-diol (0.9 g, 2.5 mmol) iniso-propanol (10 mL) was added dropwise to a stirred suspension ofsodium borohydride (0.1 g, 2.7 mmol) in iso-propanol (10 mL) at roomtemperature. The reaction progress was monitored by thin layerchromatography (silica, hexanes:ethyl acetate=1:1). Additional sodiumborohydride was added after each hour (0.36 g, 10 mmol, six times). Thereaction mixture was stirred for additional 20 h, hydrolyzed with water(10 mL), acidified with 1 N hydrochloric acid (25 mL) to pH 1, andextracted with dichloromethane (4×15 mL). The combined organic phaseswere washed with saturated sodium chloride solution (15 mL), dried overmagnesium sulfate, and concentrated in vacuo to furnish the crudeproduct (1.0 g) as a white solid in oil, which was purified by columnchromatography (silica; hexanes, then hexanes:ethyl acetate=2:1 to 1:2)to give the pure product (0.35 g, 43%) as nice white crystals. M.p.:71-75° C. ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CD₃COCD₃/CD₃OD/TMS): δ (ppm): 4.32-4.03 (m,3H), 3.52 (s, 1H), 3.22 (s, 4H), 1.63-1.20 (m, 20H), 0.83 (s, 12H). ¹³CNMR (75 MHz, CD₃COCD₃/CD₃OD/TMS): δ (ppm): 72.0, 71.7, 39.8, 38.4, 35.8,31.8, 26.7, 24.8, 24.6. HRMS (LSIMS, gly): Calcd. for C₁₉H₄₁O₃ (MH+):317.3056. found: 317.3026. HPLC: 97.1% purity.

6.18 2,2,14,14-Tetramethyl-8-oxo-pentadecanedioic acid diethyl ester

Under Ar atmosphere, to a solution of 7-bromo-2,2-dimethylheptanoic acidethyl ester (26.50 g, 100 mmol), tetra-n-butylammonium iodide (3.69 g,10 mmol) and p-toluenesulfonyl methyl isocyanide (9.80 g, 50 mmol) inanhydrous DMSO (300 mL) was added sodium hydride (4.80 g, 20.5 mmol, 60%dispersion in mineral oil) at 5-10° C. The reaction mixture was stirredat room temperature for 20 h and quenched with ice-water (300 mL). Theproduct was extracted with dichloromethane (3 □ 100 mL). The combinedorganic layers were washed with water (200 mL), half-saturated NaClsolution (2 ′ 200 mL), and saturated NaCl solution (200 mL), dried overMgSO4, and concentrated in vacuo to get the crude8-isocyano-2,2,14,14-tetramethyl-8-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-pentadecanedioicacid diethyl ester (36.8 g) as an orange oil, which was used in the nextstep without purification. To a solution of this crude product (36.8 g)in dichloromethane (450 mL) was added concentrated hydrochloric acid(110 mL) and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h. Thesolution was diluted with water (400 mL) and the aqueous layer wasextracted with dichloromethane (200 mL). The combined organic layerswere washed with saturated NaHCO₃ solution (2×150 mL) and saturated NaClsolution (150 mL). The organic solution was dried over Na2SO4 andconcentrated in vacuo. The residue was subjected to columnchromatography (silica gel, hexanes:ethyl acetate=11:1) to give2,2,14,14-tetramethyl-8-oxo-pentadecanedioic acid diethyl ester (12.20g, 66% over two steps) as a colorless oil. ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS):δ (ppm): 4.11 (q, 4H, J=6.9 Hz), 2.37 (t, 4H, J=7.5 Hz), 1.58-1.47 (m,8H), 1.35-1.10 (m, 8H), 1.24 (t, 6H, J=7.2 Hz), 1.15 (s, 12H). ¹³C NMR(75 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 211.6, 178.3, 60.5, 43.1, 42.5, 40.9,30.1, 25.5, 25.1, 24.1, 14.7. HRMS (LSIMS, nba): Calcd. for C₂₃H₄₃O₅(MH+): 399.3110. found: 399.3129.

6.19 8-Oxo-2,2,14,14-tetramethylpentadecanedioic acid

A solution of KOH (25 g) in water (50 mL) was added to a solution of2,2,14,14-tetramethyl-8-oxo-pentadecanedioic acid diethyl ester (10.69g, 155 mmol) in ethanol (400 mL), then heated at reflux for 4 h. Aftercooling, the solution was evaporated to a volume of ca. 50 mL anddiluted with water (800 mL). The organic impurities were removed byextracting with dichloromethane (2×200 mL). The aqueous layer wasacidified to pH 2 with concentrated hydrochloric acid (50 mL) andextracted with methyl tert.-butyl ether (MTBE, 3×200 mL). The combinedorganic layers were dried over magnesium sulfate and concentrated invacuo to give the crude product (9.51 g) as an oil. Crystallization fromhexanes/MTBE (50 mL:25 mL) afforded8-oxo-2,2,14,14-tetramethylpentadecanedioic acid (6.92 g, 79%) as waxy,white crystals. M.p.: 83-84° C. ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm):12.03 (s, 2H), 2.37 (t, 4H, J=7.3 Hz), 1.52-1.34 (m, 8H), 1.28-1.10 (m,8H), 1.06 (s, 12H). 13C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 210.5, 178.8,41.7, 41.2, 29.1, 25.0, 24.4, 23.1. HRMS (LSIMS, gly): Calcd. forC₁₉H₃₅O₅(MH+): 343.2484. found: 343.2485.

6.20 8-Hydroxy-2,2,14,14-tetramethylpentadecanedioic acid

Under nitrogen atmosphere, sodium borohydride (0.06 g, 1.6 mmol) wasadded to a stirred solution of8-oxo-2,2,14,14-tetramethylpentadecanedioic acid (1.18 g, 3.4 mmol) inmethanol (50 mL) at 0° C. The reaction progress was monitored by thinlayer chromatography (silica; hexanes:ethyl acetate=50:50). Additionalsodium borohydride was added after 1 h (0.48 g, 13 mmol). After 8 h, thereaction mixture was hydrolyzed with water (50 mL) and acidified withconcentrated hydrochloric acid (3 mL) to pH 1. The solution was dilutedwith water (50 mL) and extracted with dichloromethane (4×25 mL). Thecombined organic layers were washed with saturated sodium chloridesolution (2×30 mL), dried over magnesium sulfate, concentrated in vacuo,and dried in high vacuo to give8-hydroxy-2,2,14,14-tetramethylpentadecanedioic acid (0.7 g, 60%) as avery viscous oil. ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 7.42 (br. s,3H), 3.59 (br. s, 1H), 1.65-1.00 (m, 20H), 1.18 (s, 12H). ¹³C NMR (75MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 184.5, 71.8, 42.1, 40.5, 37.0, 29.8, 25.2,25.1, 24.9, 24.8. HRMS (FAB): Calcd. for C₁₉H₃₇O₅(MH+): 345.2635. found:345.2646. HPLC: 83.8% purity.

6.21 7-Isocyano-2,2-dimethyl-7-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-heptanoic acid ethylester

Under nitrogen atmosphere, to a solution of ethyl6-bromo-2,2-dimethylhexanoate (Ackerley, N. J. Med. Chem. 1995, 38,1608-1628) (36.60 g, 140 mmol), tetra-n-butylammonium iodide (4.23 g, 11mmol) and p-toluenesulfonyl methyl isocyanide (27.56 g, 140 mmol) inanhydrous DMSO (500 mL) was added sodium hydride (5.80 g, 146 mmol, 60%dispersion in mineral oil) at 5-10° C. The reaction mixture was stirredat room temperature for 20 h. The cooled solution was carefully quenchedby addition of ice-water (1000 mL). The product was extracted withdichloromethane (3×150 mL). The combined organic layers were washed withwater (200 mL) and saturated NaCl solution (2×200 mL), dried over MgSO4,and concentrated in vacuo to obtain the crude product mixture (40.9 g)as orange oil. The crude product (10.22 g) was subjected to columnchromatography on silica gel eluting with hexanes/ethyl acetate (10:1)to give 7-isocyano-2,2-dimethyl-7-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-heptanoic acidethyl ester (2.05 g, 15%) as a pale yellow oil and7-isocyano-2,2,12,12-tetramethyl-7-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-tridecanedioicacid diethyl ester (1.60 g, 8%) as a colorless oil, together with amixture of both (2.50 g,7-isocyano-2,2-dimethyl-7-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-heptanoic acid ethylester:7-isocyano-2,2,12,12-tetramethyl-7-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-tridecanedioicacid diethyl ester=90:10). ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 7.86(d, 2H, J=8.1 Hz), 7.43 (d, 2H, J=8.1 Hz), 4.48 (dd, 1H, J=7.2, 3.6 Hz),4.11 (q, 2H, J=7.2 Hz), 2.49 (s, 3H), 2.21-2.16 (m, 1H), 1.90-1.78 (m,1H), 1.56-1.50 (m, 4H), 1.25 (t, 5H, J=7.2 Hz), 1.16 (s, 6H). ¹³C NMR(75 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 177.8, 165.0, 146.7, 131.3, 130.3, 130.2,72.9, 60.5, 42.2, 40.2, 28.3, 25.8, 25.3, 25.2, 24.2, 21.9, 14.4. HRMS(LSIMS, nba): Calcd. for C₁₉H₂₈NO₄S (MH+): 366.1739. found: 366.1746.

6.22 Ethyl 12-hydroxy-2,2,11,11-tetramethyl-7-oxo-dodecanoate

Under nitrogen atmosphere, to a solution of7-isocyano-2,2-dimethyl-7-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-heptanoic acid ethylester (1.72 g, 4.71 mmol), tetra-n-butylammonium iodide (0.17 g, 0.47mmol) and 2-(5-bromo-2,2-dimethylpentyl)-tetrahydropyran (1.45 g, 4.95mmol) in anhydrous DMSO (20 mL) was added sodium hydride (0.20 g, 4.75mmol, 60% dispersion in mineral oil) at 5-10° C. The reaction mixturewas stirred for 20 h at room temperature, and the cooled solution wascarefully quenched by addition of ice-water (1000 mL). The product wasextracted with dichloromethane (3×15 mL). The combined organic layerswere washed with water (40 mL) and saturated sodium chloride solution (2′ 20 mL), dried over MgSO4, and concentrated in vacuo to obtain thecrude intermediate (3.50 g) as a brown oil. This intermediate wasdissolved in 48% aqueous sulfuric acid (6 mL) and methanol (12 mL),stirred 100 min at room temperature, and diluted with water (50 mL). Theproduct was extracted with dichloromethane (3×15 mL). The combinedorganic layers were washed with water (100 mL) and saturated NaClsolution (100 mL), dried over MgSO4, and concentrated in vacuo to obtaincrude ethyl 12-hydroxy-2,2,11,11-tetramethyl-7-oxo-dodecanoate (2.70 g)as a yellow oil. The crude product (2.5 g) was subjected to columnchromatography on silica gel eluting with hexanes/ethyl acetate (4:1,then 3:1) to give the pure product (0.82 g, 55%) as a pale yellow oil.¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 4.14-4.03 (m, 2H), 3.31 (br. s,2H), 2.42 (br. s, 1H), 2.39 (m, 4H), 1.54-1.48 (m, 6H), 1.24-1.18 (m,7H), 1.14 (s, 6H), 0.86 (s, 6H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm):211.7, 178.0, 71.2, 60.3, 43.2, 42.7, 42.1, 40.4, 37.9, 35.1, 25.2,24.6, 24.2, 24.1, 18.0, 14.3. HRMS (LSIMS, gly): Calcd. for C₁₈H₃₅O₄(MH+): 315.2535. found: 315.2541.

6.23 2,2,11,11-Tetramethyl-7-oxo-dodecanedioic acid 1-ethyl ester

A mixture of ethyl 12-hydroxy-2,2,11,11-tetramethyl-7-oxo-dodecanoate(3.26 g, 10 mmol) and pyridinium dichromate (14.0 g, 36 mmol) in DMF (45mL) was stirred at room temperature for 46 h. The solution was dilutedwith 48% aqueous sulfuric acid (30 mL) and water (300 mL). The productwas extracted with ethyl acetate (5×100 mL). The combined organic layerswere washed with saturated NaCl solution (5×100 mL), dried over MgSO4,and concentrated to give the crude product (3.19 g) as a green oil. Thecrude product (3.1 g) was subjected to column chromatography on silicagel eluting with hexanes/ethyl acetate (3:1, then 2:1) to give pure2,2,11,11-tetramethyl-7-oxo-dodecanedioic acid 1-ethyl ester (2.69 g,82%) as a pale yellow oil. ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 11.30(br. s, 1H), 4.10 (q, 2H, J=7.2 Hz), 2.39 (t, 4H, J=7.2 Hz), 1.56-1.48(m, 8H), 1.24 (t, 5H, J=7.2 Hz), 1.20 (s, 6H), 1.15 (s, 6H). ¹³C NMR (75MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 210.9, 184.4, 178.1, 60.4, 43.1, 42.7, 42.2,40.5, 39.8, 25.3, 25.0, 24.7, 24.3, 19.3, 14.4. HRMS (LSIMS, gly):Calcd. for C₁₈H₃₃O₅(MH+): 329.2328. found: 329.2330.

6.24 2,2,11,11-Tetramethyl-6-oxo-dodecanedioc acid

A solution of 2,2,11,11-tetramethyl-7-oxo-dodecanedioic acid 1-ethylester (2.5 g, 7.2 mmol) and potassium hydroxide (1.8 g, 27.3 mmol) inwater (3 mL) and ethanol (8 mL) was heated at reflux for 4 h. Ethanolwas evaporated under reduced pressure and the residue was dissolved inwater (10 mL). The solution was extracted with diethyl ether (50 mL) andthen acidified with 6 N hydrochloric acid to pH 1. The product wasextracted with diethyl ether (4×40 mL). The combined organic layers werewashed with saturated NaCl solution (2×100 mL), dried over MgSO4, andconcentrated in vacuo to give the crude product (2.17 g) as a whitesolid. The crude product (2.05 g) was recrystallized from diethylether/hexanes (30 mL/10 mL) to obtain pure2,2,11,11-tetramethyl-6-oxo-dodecanedioc acid (1.94 g, 88%) as whiteneedles. M.p.: 72-73° C. ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): 6 ppm): 11.67 (br.s, 2H), 2.41 (m, 4H), 1.60-1.52 (m, 8H), 1.29-1.24 (m, 2H), 1.20 (s,6H), 1.18 (s, 6H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 211.2, 185.1,184.9, 43.9, 42.7, 42.2, 40.3, 39.8, 25.1, 25.0, 24.7, 24.2, 19.3. HRMS(LSIMS, gly): Calcd. for C₁₆H₂₉O₅ (MH+): 301.2015. found: 301.2023.HPLC: 95.8% purity.

6.25 2,2,11,11-Tetramethyl-6-hydroxy-dodecanedioc acid

To a solution of 2,2,11,11-tetramethyl-6-oxo-dodecanedioc acid (0.51 g,1.5 mmol) in methanol (20 mL) was added sodium borohydride (0.60 g, 15.5mmol) in portions at 0° C. The mixture was stirred for 20 h, themethanol was evaporated, and the residue was carefully dissolved in 2 Nhydrochloric acid (20 mL). The solution was extracted withdichloromethane (4×15 mL) and the aqueous layer acidified with 6 Nhydrochloric acid to pH 1. The product was extracted with diethyl ether(4×40 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with saturated sodiumchloride solution (2×100 mL), dried over magnesium sulfate, andconcentrated to give the crude product (0.52 g) as a white solid. Thecrude product (0.51 g) was subjected to column chromatography on silicagel eluting with hexanes/ethyl acetate (2:1) to give pure2,2,11,11-tetramethyl-6-hydroxy-dodecanedioc acid (0.42 g, 91%) as acolorless oil. ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 9.07 (br, s, 3H),3.53 (m, 1H), 1.47-1.44 (m, 4H), 1.35 (m, 6H), 1.23-1.22 (m, 4H), 1.11(s, 6H), 1.10 (s, 6H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 184.4,184.3, 71.9, 42.2, 40.6, 40.5, 37.6, 37.1, 26.1, 25.1, 21.2. HRMS(LSIMS, gly): Calcd. for C₁₆H₃₁O₅ (MH+): 303.2171. found: 303.2157.HPLC: 86.3% purity.

6.26 1-Ethyl 14-hydroxy-2,2,13,13-tetramethyl-7-oxo-tetradecanoate

Under nitrogen atmosphere, to a solution of crude7-isocyano-2,2-dimethyl-7-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-heptanoic acid ethylester (prepared as described above, but without chromatographicpurification, 1.72 g, 4.71 mmol), tetra-n-butylammonium iodide (0.17 g,0.47 mmol) and 2-(7-bromo-2,2-dimethylheptyl)-tetrahydropyran (1.45 g,4.95 mmol) in anhydrous DMSO (20 mL) was added sodium hydride (0.20 g,4.75 mmol, 60% dispersion in mineral oil) at 5-10° C. The reactionmixture was stirred at room temperature for 20 h and the cooled solutionwas carefully quenched by addition of ice-water (1000 mL). The productwas extracted with dichloromethane (3×15 mL). The combined organiclayers were washed with water (40 mL) and saturated NaCl solution (2×20mL), dried over MgSO4, and concentrated in vacuo to obtain the crudeintermediate (3.50 g) as a brown oil. This intermediate was dissolved in48% aqueous sulfuric acid (6 mL) and methanol (12 mL). The mixture wasstirred for 100 min and diluted with water (50 mL). The product wasextracted with dichloromethane (3×15 mL). The combined organic layerswere washed with water (100 mL) and saturated NaCl solution (100 mL),dried over MgSO4, and concentrated in vacuo to obtain the crude product(2.70 g) as a yellow oil. The crude product (2.5 g) was subjected tocolumn chromatography on silica gel eluting with hexanes/ethyl acetate(4:1, then 3:1) to give pure 1-ethyl14-hydroxy-2,2,13,13-tetramethyl-7-oxo-tetradecanoate (0.82 g, 55%) as apale yellow oil. ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 4.10 (q, 2H,J=6.9 Hz), 3.30 (br. s, 2H), 2.39 (t, 4H, J=6.9 Hz), 1.98 (br. s, 1H),1.56-1.48 (m, 6H), 1.27-1.18 (m, 11H), 1.14 (s, 6H), 0.85 (s, 6H). ¹¹CNMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 211.5, 178.0, 71.9, 60.3, 42.9, 42.7,42.2, 40.5, 38.6, 35.1, 30.3, 25.2, 24.7, 24.3, 24.0, 23.8, 14.4. HRMS(LSIMS, gly): Calcd. for C₂₀H₃₉O₄ (MH+): 343.2848. found: 343.2846.

6.27 2,2,13,13-Tetramethyltetradecane-1,7,14-triol

Under Ar atmosphere, to a stirred suspension of lithium borohydride(0.30 g, 95%, 13 mmol) in dichloromethane (80 mL) was added dropwisemethanol (0.42 g, 13 mmol), keeping a gentle reflux while hydrogen gaswas formed. The mixture was stirred for 10 min at 45° C. and a solutionof 2,2,13,13-tetramethyl-7-oxo-tetradecanedioic acid 1-ethyl ester (1.57g, 4.36 mol) in dichloromethane (10 mL) was added dropwise at such arate as to maintain a gentle reflux. The reaction mixture was heated atreflux for 24 h, then cooled to room temperature and carefullyhydrolyzed with 2 N hydrochloric acid (50 mL) and saturated ammoniumchloride solution (120 mL). The aqueous layer was extracted withdichloromethane (4×50 mL). The combined organic layers were washed withwater (100 mL) and dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate. The reactionmixture was concentrated to yield the crude product as a yellow oil(1.28 g). Purification by column chromatography on silica gel elutingwith hexanes/ethyl acetate (4:1, then 3:1) followed by recrystallizationfrom dichloromethane gave pure2,2,13,13-tetramethyltetradecan-1,7,14-triol (0.86 g, 65%) as whiteneedles. M.p.: 79-80° C. ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 3.57 (br.s, 1H), 3.29 (s, 4H), 2.17 (br. s, 3H), 1.46-1.40 (m, 4H), 1.33-1.24 (m,12H), 0.85 (s, 12H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 71.8, 71.7,71.5, 38.7, 37.5, 37.3, 35.1, 30.7, 26.6, 25.7, 24.2, 24.0, 23.9, 23.8.HRMS (LSIMS, gly): Calcd. for C₁₈H₃₉O₃ (MH+): 303.2899. found: 303.2897.HPLC: 97% purity.

6.282,2,13,13-Tetramethyl-1,14-bis(tetrahydropyran-2-yloxy)tetradecan-6,9-diol

A mixture of 2,5-dimethoxytetrahydrofuran (26.43 g, 0.2 mol) and 0.6 Nhydrochloric acid (160 mL) was stirred at room temperature for 1.5 h.The pH was adjusted to 7 by addition of sodium hydrogen carbonate (8.4g) and the solution was extracted with dichloromethane (3 ′ 50 mL). Theaqueous phase was acidified with concentrated hydrochloric acid (10 mL)and stirred for another 1.5 h. Basification with sodium hydrogencarbonate (10.1 g) and extraction with dichloromethane was repeated. Intotal, the acidification—basification—extraction sequence was repeatedfour times. The combined organic extracts were dried over magnesiumsulfate and the dichloromethane was distilled off under atmosphericpressure. The residue was distilled under reduced pressure (b.p.: 75-77°C./15 mm Hg) (House, H. O. et al., J. Org. Chem. 1965, 30, 1061.B.p.=55-60° C./12 mm Hg) to give succinaldehyde as a foul smelling,colorless liquid (5.71 g, 33%), which was used immediately afterdistillation.

Under nitrogen atmosphere, to a stirred suspension of magnesium powder(3.65 g, 0.15 mol) in anhydrous THF (200 mL) was added2-(5-bromo-2,2-dimethylpentyl)-tetrahydropyran (27.9 g, 0.1 mol) at sucha rate as to maintain a gentle reflux. The reaction mixture was heatedat reflux for additional 2 h, allowed to cool to room temperature, andthen cooled in an ice-water bath. A solution of freshly distilledsuccinaldehyde (3.44 g, 0.04 mol) in THF (30 mL) was added dropwise. Thereaction mixture was left to stir at room temperature overnight. Thesolution was decanted off the excess magnesium and poured into anaqueous saturated ammonium chloride solution (300 mL). The pH wascarefully adjusted to 1-2 with 2 N hydrochloric acid. The reactionmixture was extracted with diethyl ether and the organic extracts werewashed with brine and dried over MgSO4. After solvent removal, alight-yellow oil (23.88 g) was obtained which was purified by flashcolumn chromatography (SiO₂, ethyl acetate:hexanes=1:3 to 1:1) to affordthe pure product as an almost colorless, very viscous oil (18.04 g,92%). ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 4.54-4.50 (m, 2H), 3.89-3.82(m, 2H), 3.66 (br. s, 2H), 3.48 (pseudo-t, 4H, J=9.6 Hz), 2.99 (dd, 2H,J=9.1, 3.5 Hz), 2.60 (br. s, 2H), 1.90-1.20 (m, 28H), 0.90-0.88 (m,12H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 99.4, 99.2, 76.4, 76.1,72.1, 71.7, 71.3, 62.4, 62.0, 39.2, 38.8, 38.3, 38.2, 34.1, 33.4, 30.7,30.6, 25.5, 24.9, 24.6, 24.5, 24.4, 20.0, 19.7, 19.5, 14.2. HRMS (LSIMS,nba): Calcd. for C₂₈H₅₅O₆ (MH+):

6.29 Ethyl 8-bromo-2,2-dimethyloctanoate

Under N₂ atmosphere, a solution of LDA (2.0 M inheptane/tetrahydrofuran/ethylbenzene, 2.94 L, 5.9 mol) was addeddropwise to a stirred solution of ethyl isobutyrate (720 g, 6.2 mol) inanhydrous THF (4.7 L) at −45° C. After 1 h, 1,6-dibromohexane (2400 g,9.8 mol) was added dropwise, followed by the addition of DMPU (320 mL).The reaction mixture was stirred for 1 h and then allowed to warm toroom temperature overnight. Saturated NH₄Cl solution (3 L) was added andthe mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (3×6 L). The combinedorganic layers were washed with brine (4.5 L), 1 M aqueous HCl (6 L),saturated NaHCO₃ solution (6 L), and brine (4.5 L). The solution wasdried over MgSO₄ and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was distilledunder high vacuo to furnish ethyl 8-bromo-2,2-dimethyloctanoate (856 g,52%) as a light yellowish oil. Bp 95-100° C./0.2 mm. ¹H NMR (300 MHz,CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 4.13 (q, J=7.1, 2 H), 3.39 (t, J=6.9, 2 H),1.92-1.75 (m, 2H), 1.58-1.25 (m, 8H), 1.25 (t, J=7.1, 3 H), 1.12 (s,6H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃=77.52 ppm): δ (ppm): 177.62, 60.01, 42.08,40.50, 33.63, 32.68, 29.13, 27.93, 25.00, 24.66, 14.22. HRMS (LSIMS,nba): Calcd for C₁₂H₂₄BrO₂ (MH⁺): 279.0960. found: 279.0957.

6.309-Isocyano-2,2,16,16-tetramethyl-9-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-heptadecanedioicacid diethyl ester

To a solution of ethyl 8-bromo-2,2-dimethyloctanoate (35.0 g, 125.4mmol), tetrabutylammonium iodide (4.6 g, 12.5 mmol), andp-toluenesulphonylmethyl isocyanide (TosMIC, 12.2 g, 62.7 mmol) inanhydrous DMSO (450 mL) was added sodium hydride (60% dispersion inmineral oil, 6.3 g, 158 mmol) under cooling with an ice-water bath andunder N₂ atmosphere. The reaction mixture was stirred for 23 h at roomtemperature, then carefully hydrolyzed with ice-water (500 mL) andextracted with MTBE (3×200 mL). The organic layers were washed withwater (300 mL) and brine (150 mL), dried over MgSO₄, and concentrated invacuo to give crude9-isocyano-2,2,16,16-tetramethyl-9-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-heptadecanedioicacid diethyl ester (37.0 g, 100%). ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm):7.88 (d, J=7.9 Hz, 2H), 7.42 (d, J=7.9 Hz, 2H), 4.10 (q, J=7.5 Hz, 4H),2.48 (s, 3H), 2.05-1.75 (m, 3H), 1.65-1.20 (m, 21H), 1.15 (t, J=7.5 Hz,6H), 1.10 (s, 12H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 177.89,163.75, 146.23, 131.35, 130.28, 129.82, 81.79, 60.17, 42.09, 40.57,33.09, 29.68, 25.17, 24.78, 23.66, 14.31. HRMS (LSIMS, gly): Calcd forC₃₇H₅₄NO₆S (MH⁺): 592.3672. found: 592.3667.

6.31 2,2,16,16-Tetramethyl-9-oxoheptadecanedioic acid diethyl ester

To a solution of9-isocyano-2,2,16,16-tetramethyl-9-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-heptadecanedioicacid diethyl ester (12.0 g, 20.3 mmol) in methylene chloride (200 mL)was added concd HCl (47 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred for 80 minat room temperature. The mixture was diluted with water (200 mL), thelayers were separated, and the aqueous layer was extracted withmethylene chloride (3×70 mL). The combined organic layers were washedwith saturated NaHCO₃ solution (3×40 mL) and brine (50 mL). The solutionwas dried over MgSO₄, and concentrated in vacuo to yield the crudeproduct (7.52 g). Purification by column chromatography (silica gel,ethyl acetate/hexanes=1/9) gave2,2,16,16-tetramethyl-9-oxoheptadecanedioic acid diethyl ester (3.5 g,40%) as a colorless oil. ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 4.14 (q,J=7.1 Hz, 4H), 2.41 (t, J=7.0 Hz, 4H), 1.66-1.35 (m, 20H), 1.25 (t,J=7.1 Hz, 6H), 1.17 (s, 12H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm):211.24, 177.89, 60.01, 42.69, 42.07, 40.64, 29.86, 29.07, 25.13, 24.73,23.74, 14.24. HRMS (LSIMS, gly): Calcd for C₂₅H₄₇O₅(MH⁺): 427.3423.found: 427.3430.

6.32 2,2,16,16-Tetramethylheptadecane-1,9,17-triol

Under N₂-atmosphere, methyl tert-butyl ether (MTBE, 80 mL) was added tolithium aluminum hydride (0.67 g, 17.60 mmol) and the suspension wasstirred under cooling with an ice-water bath (0° C.). A solution of2,2,16,16-tetramethyl-9-oxoheptadecanedioic acid diethyl ester (3.0 g,7.04 mmol) in MTBE (20 mL) was added dropwise, followed by additionalMTBE (40 mL). After 2 h at 0° C., the reaction mixture was carefullyquenched by addition of ethyl acetate (8 mL, 80 mmol) and allowed towarm to room temperature overnight. The mixture was cooled with anice-water bath and carefully hydrolyzed by addition of crushed ice (15g) and water (15 mL). The pH was adjusted to 1 by addition of 2 Nsulfuric acid (28 mL) and the solution was stirred at room temperaturefor 15 min. The layers were separated and the aqueous layer wasextracted with MTBE (40 mL). The combined organic layers were washedwith deionized water (50 mL), saturated NaHCO₃ solution (40 mL), brine(40 mL), dried over MgSO₄, concentrated in vacuo and dried in high vacuoto yield a crude product (2.65 g). The crude product was purified byrecrystallization from hot CH₂Cl₂ (20 mL), which was cooled to roomtemperature and then kept at −5° C. The crystals were filtered, washedwith ice-cold CH₂Cl₂ (20 mL) and dried in high vacuo. This process wasrepeated to furnish 2,2,16,16-tetramethylheptadecane-1,9,17-triol (1.59g, 65%) as a white solid. Mp 75-77° C. ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ(ppm): 3.57 (m, 1H), 3.30 (s, 4H), 1.72 (br, 2H), 1.50-1.16 (m, 25H),0.85 (s, 12H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 72.09, 38.79,37.61, 35.21, 30.70, 29.85, 25.78, 24.06, 23.92. HRMS (LSIMS, gly):Calcd for C₂₁H₄₅O₃ (MH⁺): 345.3369. found: 345.3364. HPLC: 95% pure.

6.33 8-Hydroxy-2,2,12,12-tetramethylpentadecanedioic acid diethyl ester

To a solution of 2,2,12,12-tetramethyl-8-oxopentadecanedioic aciddiethyl ester (33.6 g, 84.3 mmol) in 60% aqueous isopropanol (337 mL)was added sodium borohydride (1.6 g, 41 mmol). The reaction mixture washeated to 45° C. for 2 h, diluted with water (400 mL), and extractedwith MTBE (2×200 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with water(200 mL), dried over sodium sulfate, and concentrated in vacuo to givethe crude product (33.0 g, 98%). ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm):4.11 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 4H), 3.55-3.45 (m, 1H), 1.60-1.18 (m, 26H), 1.15 (s,12H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 178.1, 72.0, 60.3, 42.4,40.9, 37.7, 30.4, 25.8, 25.4, 25.1, 14.5. HPLC: 87.5% pure.

6.34 2,2,14,14-Tetramethyl-8-(tetrahydropyran-2-yloxy)-pentadecanedioicacid diethyl ester

Under nitrogen atmosphere, 3,4-dihydro-2H-pyran (10.2 g, 121 mmol) wasadded dropwise to a stirred solution of8-hydroxy-2,2,14,14-tetramethypentadecanedioic acid diethyl ester (16.1g, 40 mmol) and p-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (catalytic amounts)in methylene chloride (100 mL) under cooling with an ice bath. Thereaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirredovernight. After the reaction was completed (TLC), the solution wasfiltered through basic aluminum oxide (50 g), which was washed withmethylene chloride (4×30 mL). The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo togive crude product (19.5 g), which was purified by chromatography(silica gel, 200 g, heptanes/ethyl acetate=20:1, 10:1) yielding2,2,14,14-tetramethyl-8-(tetrahydropyran-2-yloxy)-pentadecanedioic aciddiethyl ester as a colorless oil (12.1 g, 62%). ¹H NMR (300 MHz,CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 4.69-4.59 (m, 1H), 4.11 (q, J=7.3 Hz, 4H),3.98-3.82 (m, 1H), 3.65-3.40 (m, 2H), 2.00-1.18 (m, 26H), 1.24 (t, J=7.1Hz, 6H), 1.15 (s, 12H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 177.74,97.36, 76.48, 62.61, 60.02, 42.05, 40.70, 40.63, 34.90, 33.38, 31.16,30.32, 30.26, 25.48, 25.10, 24.86, 19.96, 14.23.

6.352,2,14,14-Tetramethyl-8-(tetrahydropyran-2-yloxy)-pentadecane-1,15-diol

Under nitrogen atmosphere, LiAlH₄ (2.2 g, 58 mmol) was suspended inanhydrous MTBE (250 mL) and cooled with an ice/water bath.2,2,14,14-Tetramethyl-8-(tetrahydropyran-2-yloxy)-pentadecanedioic aciddiethyl ester (12.0 g, 24.7 mmol) in anhydrous MTBE (100 mL) was addeddropwise over 1.5 h. This mixture was left overnight at ambienttemperature. After the reaction was completed, deionized water (4 mL)was added followed by 20% aqueous NaOH solution (5 mL) and water (14mL). The ether solution was decanted from the formed white residue. Theresidue was washed with MTBE (4×20 mL) and the combined ether solutionswere dried over MgSO₄. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure togive crude2,2,14,14-tetramethyl-8-(tetrahydropyran-2-yloxy)-pentadecane-1,15-diolas a colorless oil (8.9 g, 90%), which was used without furtherpurification. ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 4.72-4.59 (m, 1H),4.03-3.84 (m, 1H), 3.69-3.38 (m, 2H), 3.31 (s, 4H), 2.00-1.15 (m, 28H),0.87 (s, 12H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ(ppm): 97.38, 76.57, 71.83,62.65, 38.55, 34.96, 34.84, 33.33, 31.17, 30.75, 30.63, 26.92, 25.52,24.95, 23.84, 23.70, 19.96. HRMS (EI, POS): Calcd for C₂₄H₄₈O₄ (M⁺):400.3553. found: 400.3564.

6.36 Nicotinic acid8-(tetrahydropyran-2-yloxy)-2,2,14,14-tetramethyl-15-nicotinoylpentadecylester

Anhydrous tert-butyl methyl ether (MTBE, 200 mL) and anhydrous pyridine(30 mL) were added to nicotinoyl chloride hydrochloride (12.3 g, 69mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature under nitrogenatmosphere for 1 h, then cooled to 0° C. A solution of2,2,14,14-tetramethyl-8-(tetrahydropyran-2-yloxy)-pentadecane-1,15-diol(8.8 g, 21.9 mmol) in anhydrous MTBE (50 mL) was added and the mixturewas stirred overnight at room temperature. The mixture was washed withdeionized water (3×50 mL), saturated NaHCO₃ solution (2×50 mL) and brine(50 mL), and dried over magnesium sulfate. The solvent was removed underreduced pressure to give the crude product as a light yellow oil (11.1g), which was purified by chromatography (silica gel, 75 g,heptanes:ethyl acetate=10:1, 7:1, 5:1) to give nicotinic acid8-(tetrahydropyran-2-yloxy)-2,2,14,14-tetramethyl-15-nicotinoylpentadecylester (9.2 g, 69%) as a viscous, yellow oil. ¹H NMR (300 MHz,CDCl₃/TMS): δ(ppm): 9.37-9.15 (m, 2H), 8.79 (dd, J=4.8, 1.7 Hz, 2H),8.30 (dt, J=7.9, 1.9 Hz, 2H), 7.41 (dd, J=4.8, 7.9 Hz, 2H), 4.71-4.55(m, 1H), 4.07 (s, 4H), 3.99-3.80 (m, 1H), 3.69-3.52 (m, 1H), 3.52-3.35(m, 1H), 1.92-1.08 (m, 26H), 1.00 (s, 12H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS):δ (ppm): 165.23, 153.34, 150.85, 136.99, 126.40, 123.36, 97.69, 76.77,73.45, 62.91, 39.54, 39.49, 35.19, 34.23, 33.70, 31.42, 30.97, 30.88,25.84, 25.74, 25.26, 24.61, 24.07, 20.25. HRMS (EI, POS): Calcd forC₃₆H₄N₂O₆(M⁺): 610.3982. found: 610.3977. Elemental analysis(C₃₆H₅₄N₂O₆): Calcd for C, 70.79; H, 8.91; N, 4.59. Found: C, 70.71; H,9.06; N, 4.48.

6.37 Nicotinic acid8-hydroxy-2,2,14,14-tetramethyl-15-nicotinoylpentadecyl ester

Nicotinic acid8-(tetrahydropyran-2-yloxy)-2,2,14,14-tetramethyl-15-nicotinoylpentadecylester (9.0 g, 14.7 mmol) was heated in a mixture of glacial acetic acid,THF, and water (160 mL/80 mL/40 mL) to 45° C. for 6 h, then stirredovernight at ambient temperature. After the reaction was completed(TLC), the reaction mixture was poured onto ice (220 g), stirred for30-45 min and extracted with methylene chloride (4×100 mL). The combinedorganic layers were washed with saturated NaHCO₃ solution (4×100 mL) andbrine (100 mL), dried over MgSO₄, and concentrated to give a crude oil(7.9 g). Purification by chromatography (silica gel, 75 g,heptanes:ethyl acetate=1:1) afforded nicotinic acid8-hydroxy-2,2,14,14-tetramethyl-15-nicotinoylpentadecyl ester (4.5 g,58%) as a white solid. Mp 65-67° C. ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ(ppm): 9.24 (s, 2H), 8.78 (d, J=3.8 Hz, 2H), 8.31 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 2H),7.42 (dd, J=8.0, 4.9 Hz, 2H), 4.08 (s, 4H), 3.58 (br s, 1H), 2.02 (br s,1H, OH), 1.62-1.08 (m, 20H), 1.00 (s, 12H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS):δ (ppm): 164.96, 153.03, 150.53, 136.81, 126.17, 123.16, 73.18, 71.58,39.17, 37.41, 33.96, 30.44, 25.61, 24.37, 23.78. HRMS (EI, nba): Calcdfor C₃₁H₄₆N₂O₅ (MH+): 527.3485. found: 527.3482. HPLC: 99.7% pure.Elemental analysis (C₃₁H₄₆N₂O₅): Calcd for C, 70.69; H, 8.80; N, 5.32.Found: C, 70.63; H, 8.83; N, 5.41.

6.38 Bis-(4-bromomethylphenyl)-methanone

Under irradiation with a 100-W white lamp, a mixture of4,4′-dimethylbenzophenone (40.0 g, 190.2 mmol), NBS (71.10 g, 399.5mmol), and dichloromethane (700 mL) was heated to reflux for 8 h andstirred at room temperature for 12 h. The white precipitate was removedby filtration and the filtrate was concentrated. The residue (70 g) waspurified by column chromatography on silica using hexanes/ethyl acetate(8:1, 6:1, then 4:1) as eluent to affordbis-(4-bromomethylphenyl)-methanone (52.3 g, 75%) as a colorless solid.Mp 118-119° C. ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 7.83 (d, 4H, J=7.8Hz), 7.53 (d, 4H, J=7.8 Hz), 4.56 (s, 4H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃=77.00ppm): δ (ppm): 195.3, 142.4, 137.3, 130.6, 129.2, 32.4.

6.393-{4-[4-(2-Ethoxycarbonyl-2-methylpropyl)-benzoyl]-phenyl}-2,2-dimethylpropionicacid ethyl ester

Under Ar atmosphere, to a solution of ethyl isobutyrate (18.2 g, 156.6mmol) and DMPU (1 mL) in THF (30 mL) was added LDA (80 mL, 2 M inheptanes, 160 mmol) at −78° C. The mixture was stirred for 30 min. Asolution of bis-(4-bromomethylphenyl)-methanone (21.1 g, 57.3 mmol) inTHF (100 mL) was added dropwise. The reaction mixture was allowed tostir overnight, gradually warming to room temperature. Most of the THF(120 mL) was removed under reduced pressure. The mixture was hydrolyzedwith 6 N aqueous HCl (30 mL), water (170 g), and saturated NH₄Clsolution (200 mL). The solution was extracted with ethyl acetate (200mL, 2×100 mL). The organic layers were washed with half-saturated NaClsolution (100 mL), dried over MgSO₄, and concentrated under vacuum togive a crude oil (35.8 g). Purification by column chromatography onsilica (800 g) using hexanes/ethyl acetate (10:1) as eluent afforded3-{4-[4-(2-ethoxycarbonyl-2-methylpropyl)-benzoyl]-phenyl}-2,2-dimethylpropionicacid ethyl ester (8.50 g, 34%) as a colorless oil. ¹H NMR (300 MHz,CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 7.73 (d, 4H, J=8.1 Hz), 7.26 (d, 4H, J=8.1 Hz),4.19-4.11 (m, 4H), 2.97 (s, 4H), 1.29-1.15 (m, 18H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz,CDCl₃=77.00 ppm): δ (ppm): 195.8, 176.8, 142.9, 135.8, 129.9, 129.7,60.4, 46.0, 43.4, 24.8, 14.1. HRMS (LSIMS, nba): Calcd forC₂₇H₃₅O₅(M+H): 439.2484. found: 439.2487.

6.403-(4-{Hydroxy-[4-(3-hydroxy-22-dimethylpropyl)-phenyl]-methyl}-phenyl)-2,2-dimethylpropan-1-ol

Under Ar atmosphere, to a suspension solution of LiBH₄ (1.55 g, 71.2mmol) in CH₂Cl₂ (100 mL) was added methanol (2.28 g, 71.2 mmol) at roomtemperature. The mixture was stirred under reflux for 30 min. A solutionof3-{4-[4-(2-ethoxycarbonyl-2-methylpropyl)-benzoyl]-phenyl}-2,2-dimethylpropionicacid ethyl ester (4.0 g, 9.1 mmol) in CH₂Cl₂ (50 mL) was added dropwise.The reaction mixture was heated to reflux for 100 h. The mixture washydrolyzed with 6 N HCl (10 mL), water (125 mL), and saturated NH₄Clsolution (125 mL). The solution was extracted with CH₂Cl₂ (2×50 mL). Thecombined organic layers were washed with saturated NaHCO₃ solution (150mL), dried over MgSO₄, and concentrated under vacuum to give a mixtureof3-(4-{hydroxy-[4-(3-hydroxy-2,2-dimethyl-propyl)phenyl]-methyl}-phenyl)-2,2-dimethylpropan-1-oland3-(4-{hydroxy-[4-(3-hydroxy-2,2-dimethyl-propyl)-phenyl]-methyl}-phenyl)-2,2-dimethyl-propionicacid ethyl ester (2.7 g, ratio 40/60) as a colorless oil. Under Aratmosphere, to a suspension solution of LiBH₄ (2.52 g, 116 mmol) inCH₂Cl₂ (80 mL) was added methanol (3.7 g, 116 mmol) at room temperature.The mixture was stirred at 45° C. for 30 min. A solution of the abovemixture (2.70 g) in CH₂Cl₂ (20 mL) was added dropwise. The reactionmixture was heated to reflux for 76 h. The mixture was hydrolyzed with 6N HCl (10 mL), water (150 g), and saturated NH₄Cl (150 mL), and thesolution was extracted with CH₂Cl₂ (2×80 mL). The organic layers werewashed with saturated NaCl (140 mL), dried over MgSO₄, and concentratedunder vacuum. The residue was subjected to column chromatography onsilica gel using hexanes/ethyl acetate (2:1, 1:1) as eluent to afford3-(4-{hydroxy-[4-(3-hydroxy-2,2-dimethylpropyl)-phenyl]-methyl}-phenyl)-2,2-dimethylpropan-1-ol(0.45 g, 14%) as a white solid. Mp 169-170° C. ¹H NMR (300 MHz,CD₃OD/TMS): δ (ppm): 7.15 (d, 4H, J=7.8 Hz), 7.01 (d, 4H, J=7.8 Hz),5.62 (s, 1H), 3.11 (s, 4H), 2.42 (s, 4H), 0.71 (s, 12H). ¹³C NMR (75MHz, CD₃OD=49.15 ppm): δ (ppm): 143.6, 139.2, 131.6, 127.3, 76.8, 71.4,45.2, 37.3, 24.5. HRMS (LSIMS, gly): Calcd for C₂₃H₃₁O₂ (M+H−H₂O):339.2324. found: 339.2323. HPLC: 98.1% pure.

6.413-(4-{[4-(2-Ethoxycarbonyl-2-methylpropyl)-phenyl]-hydroxymethyl}-phenyl)-2,2-dimethylpropionicacid ethyl ester

A solution of3-{4-[4-(2-ethoxycarbonyl-2-methylpropyl)-benzoyl]-phenyl}-2,2-dimethyl-propionicacid ethyl ester (4.40 g, 10.0 mmol) in methanol (80 mL) was cooled inan ice-water bath. Sodium borohydride (0.45 g, 13.7 mmol) was added andthe mixture was stirred for 5 h. Water (150 mL) and dichloromethane (65mL) were added and the layers were separated. The aqueous layer waswashed with dichloromethane (2×65 mL). The combined organic layers werewashed with saturated NaCl solution (100 mL), dried over MgSO₄, andconcentrated under vacuum. The residue was subjected to columnchromatography on silica using hexanes/ethyl acetate (9:1 and 6:1) aseluent to afford3-(4-{[4-(2-ethoxycarbonyl-2-methylpropyl)-phenyl]-hydroxymethyl}-phenyl)-2,2-dimethylpropionicacid ethyl ester (3.63 g, 82%) as a colorless oil. ¹H NMR (300 MHz,CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 7.24 (d, 4H, J=8.0 Hz), 7.07 (d, 4H, J=8.0 Hz),5.77 (s, 1H), 4.08 (q, 4H, J=7.1 Hz), 2.83 (s, 4H), 2.62 (s, 1H), 1.21(t, 6H, J=7.1 Hz), 1.16 (s, 12H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃=77.23 ppm): δ(ppm): 177.6, 142.2, 137.3, 130.3, 126.3, 75.9, 60.5, 46.0, 43.4, 25.1,14.3. HRMS (LSIMS, nba): Calcd for C₂₇H₃₅O₄ (M+H-H₂O): 423.2535. found:423.2520.

6.423-{4-[4-(2-Carboxy-2-methylpropyl-phenyl]-hydroxymethyl]-phenyl}-2,2-dimethylpropionicacid

A solution of3-(4-{[4-(2-ethoxycarbonyl-2-methylpropyl)-phenyl]-hydroxymethyl}-phenyl)-2,2-dimethylpropionicacid ethyl ester (3.6 g, 8.2 mmol) and potassium hydroxide (85%, 2.16 g,33.0 mmol) in ethanol (9 mL) and water (2.5 mL) was heated to reflux for5 h. Diethyl ether (20 mL) was added and the mixture was stirred for 1h, then diluted with water (50 mL). The mixture was extracted withdiethyl ether (2×20 mL). The aqueous solution was acidified with 6 N HCl(ca. 8 mL) to pH 1 and extracted with dichloromethane (4×35 mL). Theorganic extracts were washed with saturated NaCl solution (50 mL), driedover MgSO₄, and concentrated in vacuum to give3-{4-[4-(2-carboxy-2-methylpropyl)-phenyl]-hydroxymethyl]-phenyl}-2,2-dimethylpropionicacid (3.18 g, 100%) as colorless needles. Mp 114-116° C. ¹H NMR (300MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 10.0-8.0 (br, 2H), 7.18 (d, 4H, J=8.0 Hz),7.17 (d, 4H, J=8.0 Hz), 5.67 (s, 1H), 2.81 (s, 4H), 1.15 (s, 12H). ¹³CNMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃=77.23 ppm): δ (ppm): 184.3, 142.0, 136.9, 130.3,126.5, 75.8, 45.8, 43.6, 24.9, 24.8. HRMS (LSIMS, nba): Calcd forC₂₃H₂₇O₄ (M+H): 367.1909. found: 367.1906. HPLC: 99.3% pure.

6.43 Di-m-tolyl-methanone

An oven-dried, three-necked 1-L flask equipped with magnetic stirringbar, gas inlet, dropping funnel, and condenser was flushed with nitrogenand loaded with m-tolunitrile (49.1 g, 419 mmol) and THF (30 mL). Asolution of m-tolyl magnesium chloride in THF (1 M, 440 mL) was addeddropwise at such a rate that the internal temperature was kept below 50°C. The mixture was heated to reflux for 18 h, then cooled to −15° C.,and hydrolyzed with ice-water (210 mL) and aqueous HCl (36.5%, 300 mL).The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 min and heated to 80°C. for 18 h. Most of the THF (400 mL) was removed by distillation. Thesolution was extracted with MTBE (250 mL, 3×200 mL). The combinedorganic layers were washed with saturated NaHCO₃ solution (200 mL) andsaturated NaCl solution (200 mL), dried over MgSO₄, and concentratedunder vacuum to give di-m-tolyl-methanone (99.5 g, quantitative) as ared oil, which was used without further purification for the next step.¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 7.62 (s, 2H), 7.54 (d, 2H, J=7.0Hz), 7.36-7.31 (m, 4H), 2.37 (s, 6H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃=77.23 ppm):δ (ppm): 197.1, 138.1, 133.2, 130.5, 128.3, 127.4, 21.4 [lit. ref.:Coops, J.; Nauta, W. Th.; Ernsting, M. J. E.; Faber, M. A. C. Recueil1940, 57, 1109].

6.44 Bis-(3-bromomethylphenyl)-methanone

Under irradiation with a 100-W white lamp, a mixture ofdi-m-tolyl-methanone (99.5 g, 473 mmol), NBS (195 g, 1096 mmol), anddichloromethane (1.4 L) was heated to reflux for 20 h. The precipitatewas removed by filtration. The filtrate was washed with aqueous sodiumhydroxide solution (8%, 3×550 mL) and concentrated in vacuo to give thecrude product as a pale yellow solid (130 g), which was recrystalizedfrom methylene chloride/hexanes (800 mL/200 mL) affordingbis-(3-bromomethylphenyl)-methanone (66.20 g, 38%) as white crystals. Mp147-148° C. (lit. mp 149-151° C.; Atzmuller, M.; Vogtle, F. Chem. Ber.1978, 111, 2547-2556). ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 7.84 (s,2H), 7.75-7.64 (m, 4H), 7.49 (t, 2H, J=7.7 Hz), 4.54 (s, 4H). ¹³C NMR(75 MHz, CDCl₃=77.00 ppm): δ (ppm): 195.6, 138.5, 138.0, 133.3, 130.6,130.2, 129.1, 32.4.

6.453-{3-[3-(2-Ethoxycarbonyl-2-methylpropyl-benzoyl]-phenyl}-2,2-dimethylpropionicacid ethyl ester

Under Ar atmosphere, to a solution of ethyl isobutyrate (59 g, 513 mmol)in THF (100 mL) was added LDA (256 mL, 2 M in heptanes, 512 mmol) at−78° C. The mixture was stirred for 30 min and a solution ofbis-(3-bromomethylphenyl)-methanone (66.0 g, 179 mmol) in THF (100 mL)was added dropwise. The reaction mixture was allowed to stir overnight,gradually warming to room temperature. The mixture was hydrolyzed withice (500 g) and water (800 g). The solution was extracted with MTBE(5×200 mL). The organic layers were washed with saturated NaHCO₃solution (100 mL) and saturated NaCl solution (100 mL), dried overMgSO₄, and concentrated under vacuum. The residual oil (95 g) wassubjected to column chromatography on silica (800 g) using hexanes/ethylacetate (10:1) as eluent to afford3-{3-[3-(2-ethoxycarbonyl-2-methylpropyl)-benzoyl]-phenyl})-2,2-dimethylpropionicacid ethyl ester (49.4 g, 63%) as a pale yellow oil. ¹H NMR (300 MHz,CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 7.67 (m, 2H), 7.59 (s, 2H), 7.40-7.38 (m, 4H), 4.11(q, 4H, J=7.2 Hz), 2.96 (s, 4H), 1.23 (s, 12H), 1.22 (t, 6H, J=7.2 Hz).¹³C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃=77.00 ppm): δ (ppm): 196.6, 176.9, 138.2, 137.4,134.1, 131.5, 128.3, 127.9, 60.4, 45.9, 43.5, 25.0, 14.1. HRMS (LSIMS,gly): Calcd for C₂₇H₃₅O₅ (M+H): 439.2484. found: 439.2484.

6.463-(3-{Hydroxy-[3-(3-hydroxy-2,2-dimethylpropyl)-phenyl]-methyl}-phenyl)-2,2-dimethylpropan-1-ol

Under Ar atmosphere, to a suspension of LiAlH₄ (7.90 g, 208 mmol) inMTBE (200 mL) was added dropwise a solution of3-(3-[3-(2-ethoxycarbonyl-2-methylpropyl)-benzoyl]-phenyl)-2,2-dimethylpropionicacid ethyl ester (25.9 g, 59 mmol) in MTBE (150 mL). The reactionmixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 h and heated to refluxfor 3 h. Ethyl acetate (100 mL) was added and the reaction mixture washeated to reflux for 1 h and cooled to room temperature. The reactionmixture was poured into ice (500 g) and acidified with hydrochloric acidsolution (2 N, 800 mL). The aqueous solution was extracted with MTBE(4×200 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with saturatedNaHCO₃ solution (200 mL) and saturated NaCl solution (200 mL), driedover MgSO₄, and concentrated under vacuum. The residue (22.6 g) wassubjected to column chromatography on silica gel using hexanes/ethylacetate (3:2) as eluent to afford3-(3-{hydroxy-[3-(3-hydroxy-2,2-dimethylpropyl)-phenyl]-methyl}-phenyl)-2,2-dimethylpropan-1-ol(19.0 g, 90%) as a white solid. Mp 98-99° C. ¹H NMR (300 MHz,CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 7.26-7.19 (m, 6H), 7.06-7.03 (m, 2H), 5.80 (d, 1H,J=3.4 Hz), 3.23 (s, 4H), 3.05 (d, 1H, J=3.4 Hz), 2.56 (s, 4H), 2.07 (brd, 2H, J=4.4 Hz), 0.85 (s, 12H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz, CD₃OD=49.15 ppm): δ(ppm): 145.5, 140.2, 130.5, 130.1, 128.7, 125.4, 77.1, 71.5, 45.6, 37.4,24.6, 24.5. HRMS (FAB, gly): Calcd for C₂₃H₃₃O₃(M+H): 357.2430. found:357.2388. HPLC: 99.8% pure.

6.473-(3-{[3-(2-Ethoxycarbonyl-2-methylpropyl)-phenyl]-hydroxymethyl}-phenyl)-2,2-dimethylpropionicacid ethyl ester

Under Ar atmosphere, to a solution of3-{3-[3-(2-ethoxycarbonyl-2-methyl-propyl)-benzoyl]-phenyl}-2,2-dimethylpropionicacid ethyl ester (12.37 g, 28.2 mmol) in methanol (240 mL) was addedsodium borohydride (0.45 g, 13.7 mmol) under cooling with an ice waterbath. The mixture was stirred for 5 h and water (480 mL) anddichloromethane (200 mL) were added. The aqueous layer was extractedwith dichloromethane (2×200 mL). The combined organic layers were washedwith saturated NaHCO₃ solution (150 mL and saturated NaCl solution (150mL), dried over MgSO₄, and concentrated under vacuum to give3-(3-{[3-(2-ethoxycarbonyl-2-methylpropyl)-phenyl]-hydroxymethyl}-phenyl)-2,2-dimethylpropionicacid ethyl ester (12.4 g, 100%) as a colorless oil, which was used forthe next step without further purification. ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS):δ (ppm): 7.20-7.18 (m, 4H), 7.10 (s, 2H), 7.00-6.98 (m, 2H), 5.69 (d,1H, J=3.2 Hz), 4.02 (q, 4H, J=7.1 Hz), 2.97 (d, 1H, J=3.2 Hz), 2.81 (s,4H), 1.19 (t, 6H, J=7.1 Hz), 1.13 (s, 12H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃=77.23ppm): δ (ppm): 177.6, 143.8, 138.2, 129.3, 128.5, 128.1, 124.8, 76.1,60.5, 46.3, 43.6, 25.1, 25.0, 14.3. HRMS (LSIMS, gly): Calcd forC₂₇H₃₅O₄ (M+H−H₂O): 423.2535. found: 423.2542.

6.483-{3-[3-(2-Carboxy-2-methylpropyl)-phenyl]-hydroxymethyl]-phenyl}-2,2-dimethylpropionicacid

A solution of3-(3-({[3-(2-Ethoxycarbonyl-2-methylpropyl)-phenyl]-hydroxymethyl}-phenyl)-2,2-dimethylpropionicacid ethyl ester (12.8 g, 29.1 mmol) and potassium hydroxide (85%, 7.4g, 112.0 mmol) in ethanol (21 mL) and water (9 mL) was heated to refluxfor 4 h. MTBE (100 mL) was added and the mixture was stirred for 72 h,then diluted with water (50 mL). The aqueous layer was extracted withMTBE (2×50 mL). The aqueous solution was acidified with 6 N HCl (ca. 20mL) to pH 1 and extracted with dichloromethane (4×100 mL). The organicextracts were washed with saturated NaCl solution (50 mL), dried overMgSO₄, and concentrated in vacuum to give a colorless solid (10.5 g,94%). Recrystallization from dichloromethane (50 mL) and ethanol (10 mL)yielded3-{3-[3-(2-carboxy-2-methylpropyl)-phenyl]-hydroxymethyl]-phenyl}-2,2-dimethylpropionicacid (6.7 g, 60%) in form of colorless crystals. Mp 116-117° C. ¹H NMR(300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 7.44-7.41 (m, 2H), 7.26-7.22 (m, 4H)7.06-7.03 (m, 2H), 5.73 (s, 1H), 2.83 (m, 4H), 1.27 (s, 6H), 1.25 (s,6H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz, DMSO-d₆/TMS): δ (ppm): 178.9, 145.6, 138.2, 128.8,128.5, 128.1, 124.7, 74.8, 45.9, 43.0, 25.2, 25.1. HRMS (LSIMS, EI):Calcd for C₂₃H₂₆O₄ [M−H₂O]⁺: 366.1831. found: 366.1821. HLPC: 99.3%pure.

6.49 2,2-Dimethyl-8-oxododecanoic Acid Ethyl Ester

An aqueous solution of NaOH (30%, 240 mL) was added dropwise to astirred solution of 4-iodobutane (110.5 g, 0.6 mol), p-toluenesulfonylmethyl isocyanide (58.6 g, 0.3 mol), and tetrabutylammonium iodide (8.0g, 21.6 mmol) in CH₂Cl₂ (300 mL) at room temperature. The reactionmixture was stirred overnight and diluted with water (200 mL). Theorganic layer was separated and the aqueous layer was extracted withCH₂Cl₂ (3×100 mL). The organic layers were combined, washed withsaturated NaCl solution (100 mL), dried over MgSO₄, and concentrated invacuo. The residue was taken up in diethyl ether (3×200 mL) andfiltered. The filtrate was concentrated and purified by columnchromatography (silica gel, ethyl acetate/hexanes=1:3) to give1-(1-isocyanopentane-1-sulfonyl)-4-methylbenzene (65.7 g, 87%) as anoil. Under N₂-atmosphere, sodium hydride (60% dispersion in mineral oil,11.0 g, 0.275 mol) was added in portions to a solution of ethyl7-bromo-2,2-dimethylheptanoate (72.8 g, 0.27 mol) and1-(1-isocyanopentane-1-sulfonyl)-4-methylbenzene (69.0 g, 0.27 mol) inDMSO (500 mL) and diethyl ether (500 mL) at room temperature. After 30min, tetrabutylammonium iodide (8.0 g, 21.7 mmol) was added and themixture was stirred for 5 h. A precipitate formed and additional DMSO(500 mL) was added. After stirring overnight at room temperature, themixture was heated to reflux for 3 h. Water (500 mL) and diethyl ether(500 mL) were added and the layers were separated. The aqueous layer wasextracted with diethyl ether (4×200 mL). The combined organic layerswere washed with water (500 mL) and saturated NaCl solution (300 mL),dried over MgSO₄, and concentrated in vacuo to give crude8-isocyano-2,2-dimethyl-8-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-dodecanoic acid ethylester (126.2 g) as a dark oil, which was used without furtherpurification. Concentrated, hydrochloric acid (200 mL) was added slowlyto a solution of crude8-isocyano-2,2-dimethyl-8-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-dodecanoic acid ethylester (126.2 g, 0.29 mol) in methylene chloride (300 mL). The reactionmixture was stirred at room temperature for 4 h. Water (500 mL) wasadded. The aqueous layer was separated and extracted with methylenechloride (3×100 mL). The organic solutions were combined, washed withwater (300 mL) and saturated, aqueous NaHCO₃ solution (200 mL) and driedover MgSO₄. The solvent was evaporated and the residue was purified bycolumn chromatography (silica gel, ethyl acetate/hexanes=1:10) to yield2,2-dimethyl-8-oxododecanoic acid ethyl ester (69.6 g, 89%) as an oil.¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 4.1 (q, J=7.3 Hz, 2H), 2.40-2.31(m, 4H), 1.58-1.45 (m, 6H), 1.31-1.19 (m, 6H), 1.22 (t, 3H, J=7.3 Hz),1.12 (s, 6H), 0.88 (t, J=7.3 Hz, 3H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ(ppm): 210.5, 178.0, 60.5, 42.5, 42.0, 30.0, 27.0, 26.0, 25.5, 24.0,23.0, 14.5, 14.0. HRMS (LSIMS, gly): Calcd for C₁₆H₃₁O₃ (MH⁺): 271.2273.found: 271.2275. HPLC: 84% pure.

6.50 2,2-Dimethyldodecane-1,8-diol

A solution of 2,2-dimethyl-8-oxododecanoic acid ethyl ester (14.33 g,5.3 mmol) in Et₂O (30 mL) was added to a suspension of LiAlH₄ (4.6 g, 12mmol) in Et₂O (200 mL). The reaction mixture was heated to reflux for 2h. Water (100 mL) and aqueous HCl (10%, 200 mL) were added. The aqueoussolution was separated and extracted with Et₂O (2×100 mL). The combinedorganic solutions were washed with saturated, aqueous NaHCO₃ solution(100 mL) and brine (50 mL) and dried over MgSO₄. The solvent wasevaporated and the residue was purified by column chromatography (silicagel, ethyl acetate/hexanes=1:10, 200 mL, then 1:3, 150 mL) to yield2,2-dimethyldodecan-1,8-diol (9.9 g, 81%) as a colorless oil. ¹H NMR(300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 3.55 (br s, 1H), 3.29 (s, 2H), 1.7 (br.s, 2H), 1.42-1.20 (m, 16H), 0.89 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H), 0.84 (s, 6H). ¹³CNMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 72.1, 72.0, 38.7, 37.6, 37.3, 35.2,30.8, 28.0, 25.8, 24.0, 23.9, 22.9, 14.3. HRMS (LSIMS, gly): Calcd forC₁₄H₃₁O₂(MH⁺): 231.2324. found: 231.2324. HPLC: 99.8% pure. Elementalanalysis (C₁₄H₃₀O₂): Calcd for C, 72.99; H, 13.12. Found: C, 72.75; H,13.23.

6.51 8-Hydroxy-2,2-dimethyldodecanoic acid

Sodium borohydride (8.0 g, 0.21 mol) was added in portions to2,2-dimethyl-8-oxododecanoic acid (27.02 g, 0.11 mol) in ethanol (200mL), followed by addition of Na₂CO₃ (5 g) while the reaction mixture wasgently refluxed. The reaction mixture was stirred at 40-50° C. for 3.5 hand at 60° C. for 1 h. Water (100 mL) and aqueous HCl (10%, 100 mL) wereadded. The mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (3×80 mL). Theorganic solutions were combined, washed with water (100 mL) and brine(2×50 mL), and dried over MgSO₄. The solvent was evaporated and theresidue was purified twice by column chromatography (silica gel, ethylacetate/heptane=1:3). Coevaporation with toluene and drying in highvacuo at 70° C. for 1 h gave 8-hydroxy-2,2-dimethyldodecanoic acid (9. 6g, 35%) as an oil. ¹H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 7.5-6.5 (br,1H), 3.60 (m, 1H), 1.53-1.29 (m, 17H), 1.21 (s, 6H), 0.91 (t, J=6.6 Hz,3H). ¹³C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl₃/TMS): δ (ppm): 185.0, 73.0, 43.1, 41.5,38.2, 38.0, 31.2, 28.8, 26.5, 26.0, 25.9, 23.8, 15.1. HRMS (LSIMS, gly):Calcd for C₁₄H₂₉O₃(MH⁺): 245.2116. found: 245.2107. HPLC: 97.1% pure.Elemental analysis (C₁₄H₂₈O₃): Calcd for C, 68.81; H, 68.67. Found: C,68.67; H, 11.64.

7. BIOLOGICAL ASSAYS 7.1 Effects of Illustrative Compounds of theInvention on NonHDL Cholesterol, HDL Cholesterol, Triglyceride Levels,Glycemic Control Indicators and Body Weight Control in Obese FemaleZucker Rats

In a number of different experiments, illustrative compounds of theinvention are administered daily at a dose of up to 100 mg/kg to chowfed obese female Zucker rats for fourteen days in the morning by oralgavage in 1.5% carboxymethylcellulose/0.2% Tween 20 or 20% ethanol/80%polyethylene glycol (dosing vehicles). Animals are weighed daily.Animals are allowed free access to rodent chow and water throughout thestudy except on days of blood sampling where food is restricted for sixhours prior to blood sampling. Blood glucose is determined after the 6hour fast in the afternoon without anesthesia from a tail vein. Serum isalso prepared from pretreatment blood samples subsequently obtained fromthe orbital venous plexus (with O₂/CO₂ anesthesia) and following thefourteenth dose at sacrifice from the heart following 02/CO₂ anesthesia.Serums are assayed for lipoprotein cholesterol profiles, triglycerides,total cholesterol, Non-HDL cholesterol, HDL cholesterol, the ratio ofHDL cholesterol to that of Non-HDL cholesterol, insulin, non-esterifiedfatty acids, and beta-hydroxy butyric acid. The percent body weight gainand the ratio of liver to body weight is also determined. These areshown as absolute values or as a percent change of the pretreatmentvalues in Table 1 for

7.2 Effects of Illustrative Compounds of the Invention on the In VitroLipid Synthesis in Isolated Hepatocytes

Compounds were tested for inhibition of lipid synthesis in primarycultures of rat hepatocytes. Male Sprague-Dawley rats were anesthetizedwith intraperitoneal injection of sodium pentobarbital (80 mg/kg). Rathepatocytes were isolated essentially as described by the method ofSeglen (Seglen, P. O. Hepatocyte suspensions and cultures as tools inexperimental carcinogenesis. J. Toxicol. Environ. Health 1979, 5,551-560). Hepatocytes were suspended in Dulbecco's Modified EaglesMedium containing 25 mM D-glucose, 14 mM HEPES, 5 mM L-glutamine, 5 mMleucine, 5 mM alanine, 10 mM lactate, 1 mM pyruvate, 0.2% bovine serumalbumin, 17.4 mM non-essential amino acids, 20% fetal bovine serum, 100nM insulin and 20 μg/mL gentamycin) and plated at a density of 1.5×10⁵cells/cm² on collagen-coated 96-well plates. Four hours after plating,media was replaced with the same media without serum. Cells were grownovernight to allow formation of monolayer cultures. Lipid synthesisincubation conditions were initially assessed to ensure the linearity of[1-¹⁴C]-acetate incorporation into hepatocyte lipids for up to 4 hours.Hepatocyte lipid synthesis inhibitory activity was assessed duringincubations in the presence of 0.25 μCi [1-¹⁴C]-acetate/well (finalradiospecific activity in assay is 1 Ci/mol) and 0, 1, 3, 10, 30, 100 or300 μM of compounds for 4 hours. At the end of the 4-hour incubationperiod, medium was discarded and cells were washed twice with ice-coldphosphate buffered saline and stored frozen prior to analysis. Todetermine total lipid synthesis, 170 μl of MicroScint-E® and 50 μl waterwas added to each well to extract and partition the lipid solubleproducts to the upper organic phase containing the scintillant. Lipidradioactivity was assessed by scintillation spectroscopy in a PackardTopCount NXT. Lipid synthesis rates were used to determine the IC₅₀s ofthe compounds that are presented in Table 3.

TABLE 1 Examples of effects of oral daily treatment of obese femaleZucker rats with compounds A-K of the invention for fourteen daysPercent of Pre-treatment Dose % wt. HDL-C/ Non- Compound Expt. # n(mg/kg/day) gain non-HDL-C TG TC HDL-C HDL-C Glucose Insulin NEFA BHAVehicle LR63 5 13 2 6 −17 7 −22 2 −1 50 211 A 4 100 12 5 −59 14 −41 50−2 43 −11 231 Vehicle LR92 4 7 2 1 −3 24 −10 −5 −9 11 62 B 4 100 1 35−87 105 −81 237 −3 −52 −28 199 Vehicle LR107 4 8 8 3 −4 3 −3 −14 −11 −13139 C 4 100 3 40 −90 105 −80 169 −11 −57 −42 171 Vehicle LR28 5 1 1 −41−14 −39 58 −16 −43 −37 236 F 2 100 3 2 −46 53 −15 222 10 −4 −43 1056Vehicle LR98 5 9 2 23 1 116 −26 8 19 6 29 G 2 100 9 12 −80 21 −68 68 14−38 −62 163 Vehicle LR98 5 9 2 23 1 116 −26 8 19 6 29 H 3 100 9 3 −36 61−5 115 19 −30 −30 97 Vehicle LR52 4 8 2 −6 −14 −16 −7 3 −36 −7 31 J 3100 12 2 −23 −6 −12 −2 21 −11 −32 183 Vehicle LR119 5 11 4 9 20 −6 28 63 −2 65 K 3 100 10 9 −45 35 −38 62 3 41 −32 253

TABLE 2 Examples of effects of oral daily treatment of obese femaleZucker rats with compounds L and M of the invention for fourteen daysdays Percent of Pre-treatment Dose % wt. HDL-C/ Non- Compound Expt. # n(mg/kg/day) gain non-HDL-C TG TC HDL-C HDL-C Glucose Insulin NEFA BHAVehicle LR118 5 10 4 8 1 43 −8 −2 −24 14 81 L 3 100 12 4 −37 −3 −11 −213 −37 −27 88 Vehicle LR118 5 10 4 8 1 43 −8 −2 −24 14 81 M 3 100 10 3−11 15 7 19 5 −5 −23 63 n is number of animals per experiment

TABLE 3 Effect of Illustrative Compounds of the Invention on the LipidSynthesis in Primary Rat Hepatocytes. 95% Confidence Interval CompoundIC₅₀ (μM) Lower Upper r² A 3.4 2.5 4.5 0.99 B 5.1 3.6 7.3 0.99 C 1.0 0.52.0 0.99 D 1.6 1.2 2.0 0.99 E 8.3 4.6 15.1 0.98 F 6.4 3.7 11.1 0.99 G7.8 6.7 8.9 0.99 H 2.6 1.5 4.4 0.98 I 2.3 1.4 3.7 0.99 J 17 8.7 34.40.98 K 14 12.2 15.8 0.99

7.3 Effects of Compound B of the Invention on VLDL Cholesterol LDLCholesterol, HDL Cholesterol. Triglyceride Levels, Glycemic ControlIndicators, Body Weight and Bile Acids in Female Syrian Hamsters

Ten week old female Syrian hamsters were acclimated for 21 days to ashortened light and dark cycle (10 hours of light/14 hours of darkness).During the acclimation and drug intervention period animals were allowedfree access to rodent chow (Purina 5001) and water except for a 6 hourperiod prior to blood sampling. Following the 21 day acclimation periodESP 55015 was administered daily for three weeks, between 8 10 AM, at adose of 100 mg/Kg by oral gavage in a dosing vehicle consisting of 20%Ethanol/80% Polyethylene glycol 200 [v/v]. Prior to and in the afternoonfollowing the 13th and 21st doses blood samples were collected, between2 PM and 4 PM, by administering O₂/CO₂ anesthesia and bleeding from theorbital venous plexus. All blood samples were processed for separationof serum. Serum samples were subsequently assayed for total cholesterol,total cholesterol lipoprotein profiles (HDL cholesterol, LDL cholesteroland VLDL cholesterol), the ratio of HDL cholesterol, LDL cholesterol andVLDL cholesterol), the ratio of HDL cholesterol to non HDL cholesterol(LDL C, VLDL C) and triglycerides (Table 4). Percent body weight gainand ratio of liver weight to body weight were also determined.

TABLE 4 Effect of Compound B in chow-fed hamster after 3 weeks of dosingDose Body wt. VLDL-C LDL-C HDL-C TG Bile Acids Compound Expt. # n(mg/kg/day) (gm) (mg/dl) (mg/dl) (mg/dl) (mg/dl) Glucose Insulin (ng/ml)Vehicle LR100 5 0 148 ± 4 9 ± 1 41 ± 2 83 ± 4 325± 122 ± 4 30,600± BLR100 5 100 146 ± 2 4 ± 2 44 ± 4 63 ± 4 128 ± 37 122 ± 3 2.4 ± 0.767,108 ± 17,529

The present invention is not to be limited in scope by the specificembodiments disclosed in the examples which are intended asillustrations of a few aspects of the invention and any embodimentswhich are functionally equivalent are within the scope of thisinvention. Indeed, various modifications of the invention in addition tothose shown and described herein will become apparent to those skilledin the art and are intended to fall within the appended claims.

1-2. (canceled)
 3. A method for treating dyslipidemia in a humanpatient, comprising orally administering to a human patient in need ofsuch treatment a therapeutically effective amount of a compound offormula I to treat the dyslipidemia, wherein formula I is representedby:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein: (a) eachoccurrence of m is independently an integer ranging from 0 to 5; (b)each occurrence of n is independently an integer ranging from 3 to 7;(c) X is (CH₂)_(z), wherein z is an integer from 0 to 4; (d) eachoccurrence of R¹, R², R¹¹, and R¹² is independently H, (C₁-C₆)alkyl, orphenyl, wherein R¹, R², R¹¹, and R¹² are not each simultaneously H; and(e) each occurrence of Y¹ and Y² is independently OH, COOH, COOR³,

wherein R³ is (C₁-C₆)alkyl, phenyl, or benzyl and is unsubstituted orsubstituted with one or more halo, OH, or (C₁-C₆)alkoxy. 4-6. (canceled)7. The method of claim 3, wherein each occurrence of Y¹ and Y² isindependently OH, COOR³, or COOH.
 8. The method of claim 3, wherein m is0.
 9. The method of claim 3, wherein n is
 5. 10. The method of claim 3,wherein z is
 0. 11. The method of claim 10, wherein R¹, R², R¹¹, and R¹²are (C₁-C₆)alkyl.
 12. The method of claim 11, wherein Y¹ and Y² is COOH.13. The method of claim 3, wherein the compound of formula I is thefollowing:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 14. The method of claim3, wherein the compound of formula I is the following:


15. A method for treating hypercholesterolemia in a human patient,comprising orally administering to a human patient in need of suchtreatment a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula Ito treat the hypercholesterolemia, wherein formula I is represented by:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein: (a) eachoccurrence of m is independently an integer ranging from 0 to 5; (b)each occurrence of n is independently an integer ranging from 3 to 7;(c) X is (CH₂)_(z), wherein z is an integer from 0 to 4; (d) eachoccurrence of R¹, R², R¹¹, and R¹² is independently H, (C₁-C₆)alkyl, orphenyl, wherein R¹, R², R¹¹, and R¹² are not each simultaneously H; and(e) each occurrence of Y¹ and Y² is independently OH, COOH, COOR³,

wherein R³ is (C₁-C₆)alkyl, phenyl, or benzyl and is unsubstituted orsubstituted with one or more halo, OH, or (C₁-C₆)alkoxy.
 16. The methodof claim 15, wherein each occurrence of Y¹ and Y² is independently OH,COOR³, or COOH.
 17. The method of claim 15, wherein m is
 0. 18. Themethod of claim 15, wherein n is
 5. 19. The method of claim 15, whereinz is
 0. 20. The method of claim 19, wherein R¹, R², R¹¹, and R¹² are(C₁-C₆)alkyl.
 21. The method of claim 20, wherein Y¹ and Y² is COOH. 22.A method for treating hypercholesterolemia in a human patient,comprising orally administering to a human patient in need of suchtreatment a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula Ito treat the hypercholesterolemia, wherein formula I is represented by:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 23. The method of claim22, wherein the compound of formula I is the following:


24. The method of claim 15, wherein the compound of formula I is orallyadministered to the human patient in the form of a pharmaceuticalcomposition that comprises said compound of formula I.
 25. The method ofclaim 22, wherein the compound of formula I is orally administered tothe human patient in the form of a pharmaceutical composition thatcomprises said compound of formula I.
 26. The method of claim 23,wherein the compound of formula I is orally administered to the humanpatient in the form of a pharmaceutical composition that comprises saidcompound of formula I.